JP7745842B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying visual effects.

Some conventional gaming machines display a "BONUS Confirmed" object as a sign when a jackpot is confirmed, and add effects to the "BONUS Confirmed" object to make it stand out (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-76384 A

However, in Patent Document 1, the effect is simply displayed on the "BONUS confirmed" object, which poses the problem of not effectively making the displayed object stand out.

The present invention was developed to address these issues, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can make objects stand out more effectively.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
When the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state and then controlled to the first advantageous state,
a first object corresponding to the name of the first advantageous state can be displayed;
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed;
When the state is controlled to a second advantageous state after the variable display of the effect identification information has started in the special state, a third object corresponding to the name of the second advantageous state can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
the second object is started to be displayed without an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object;
the third object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
the stay effect of the first object is an effect that imitates the first object and expands it,
the first object continues to be displayed even after the stay effect of the first object is removed,
the stay effect of the third object is an effect that imitates the third object and expands it;
the third object continues to be displayed even after the stay effect of the third object is erased ,
The display of the first object and the third object begins at a timing after the start of the advantageous state when the variable display that triggers control into the advantageous state ends and the display of the second object begins .
This allows the first object and the third object, which have different display patterns when they appear and when they remain, to suitably indicate the type of advantageous state, and further allows the second object, which has different display patterns when it appears and when it remains, to suitably instruct the launch of gaming media into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 70, Figure 71

The present invention may have only the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have both the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention and features other than those specific features.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of display priorities. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a deviation fluctuation pattern. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot fluctuation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern type determination table. An explanatory diagram of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a game control data storage area. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a performance control data storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing during jackpot release. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. A flowchart showing an example of a performance process during a jackpot. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be performed during variable display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be performed during variable display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be performed during variable display. An explanatory diagram of the game states in which each effect can be executed and the effects that are displayed. An explanatory diagram of the game states in which each effect can be executed and the effects that are displayed. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing whether or not a hold display effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the timing of the change in display mode of the hold display. An explanatory diagram of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the decorative pattern enlargement effect when the variable display starts. An explanatory diagram of the decision ratio for whether or not to execute a dialogue preview performance and the decision ratio for the dialogue to be displayed. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the pattern determination ratio of weak super reach title effects, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the pattern determination ratio of strong super reach title effects. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a cut-in effect is executed and the effect pattern determination ratio. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when variable display begins. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the decorative pattern enlargement presentation is executed at the start of variable display. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the expansion effect is executed when the pattern stops. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the expansion effect is executed when the pattern stops. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the first line preview presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the second line preview presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a pseudo-consecutive presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when pseudo-consecutive presentation is not being executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a normal reach presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the weak super reach title presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a weak super reach presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the advanced presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the strong super reach title presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the strong super reach title presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a cut-in presentation is performed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a cut-in presentation is performed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the deciding button presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the pattern matching presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the variable display result is a miss. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the first line preview presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the second line preview presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a reach suggestion presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the strong super reach title presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the strong super reach title presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a cut-in presentation is performed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the deciding button presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the pattern matching presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a fanfare presentation is being performed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a fanfare presentation is being performed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the first right-hit display presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the V Challenge presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the V Challenge presentation and the V Challenge success presentation are executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the V winning presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the ending presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the first left-hit display presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the second left-hit display presentation is executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the first prize ball number announcement presentation and the second prize ball announcement presentation are executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the hold consecutive suggestion presentation and hold consecutive notification presentation are executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when the hold consecutive suggestion presentation and hold consecutive notification presentation are executed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a demo presentation is performed. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode when a demo presentation is performed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a magnification effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a decorative effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a decorative effect. FIG. 10 is a comparative diagram showing a case where a decorative effect is displayed and a case where an enlargement effect is displayed. FIG. 10 is a comparative diagram showing a case where a decorative effect is displayed and a case where an enlargement effect is displayed. FIG. 10 is a comparative diagram showing a case where a decorative effect is displayed and a case where an enlargement effect is displayed. FIG. 10 is a comparative diagram showing a case where a decorative effect is displayed and a case where an enlargement effect is displayed. FIG. 10 is a comparative diagram showing a case where a decorative effect is displayed and a case where an enlargement effect is displayed. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display based on the variation pattern of a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display based on the variation pattern of a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display based on the variation pattern of a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display based on the variation pattern of a super reach. This is a timing chart for the decorative pattern expansion effect when variable display begins. 10 is a timing chart for the first line preview performance. This is a timing chart for the second line preview performance. This is a timing chart for the pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart for normal reach performance. This is a timing chart for the strong super reach title presentation. This is a timing chart for the strong super reach title presentation. This is a timing chart for the pattern matching effect. This is a timing chart for the preview button performance. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of each period in a timing chart. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of each period in a timing chart. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of each period in a timing chart. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of the relationship between periods in a timing chart. A comparative diagram of the first line preview performance and the second line preview performance. This is a comparison diagram of strong super reach title presentations. This is a comparison diagram between the decorative pattern expansion effect at the start of variable display and the normal reach effect. This is a comparison diagram between the decorative pattern enlargement effect at the start of variable display and the pattern matching effect. A comparison diagram of the expansion effect when the pattern stops and the normal reach effect. This is a comparison diagram of the expansion effect when the pattern stops and the pattern matching effect. This is a comparison diagram between normal reach effects and pattern matching effects. 10 is a timing chart of a normal reach effect in a modified example. This is a presentation diagram showing the display mode of the second left-hit display presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table and jackpot types in a modified example.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to be operated;
In a second situation, the display size of the object corresponding to the second situation can be changed;
starting to display an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation at a timing related to the completion of an action of the object in the first situation, and displaying the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation so that a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed superimposed on each other;
starting to display an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation at a timing related to the display size of the object in the second situation becoming a specified size, and displaying the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation so that a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed superimposed on each other;
a length of a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner is different from a length of a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by displaying different types of objects with effects at multiple times, the player has more opportunities to pay attention to the presentation; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, a gaming machine can be provided that makes the object stand out without significantly reducing visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 48, 53, 54, 55, 59, 112, 114, 115, 116, and 121

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to be operated;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to be operated;
an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be displayed at a timing related to the completion of the action of the object in the first situation;
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be displayed at a timing related to the completion of the action of the object in the second situation;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a length of a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner is different from a length of a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by displaying different types of objects with effects at multiple times, the player has more opportunities to pay attention to the presentation; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, a gaming machine can be provided that makes the object stand out without significantly reducing visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 48, 53, 54, 55, 59, 112, 114, 115, 116, and 121

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In a first situation, the display size of an object corresponding to the first situation can be changed;
In a second situation, the display size of the object corresponding to the second situation can be changed;
an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be displayed at a timing related to the display size of the object in the first situation becoming a specified size;
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be displayed at a timing related to the display size of the object in the second situation becoming a specified size;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a length of a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner is different from a length of a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by displaying different types of objects with effects at multiple times, the player has more opportunities to pay attention to the presentation; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, a gaming machine can be provided that makes the object stand out without significantly reducing visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 48, Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 59, Figure 112, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound;
The display means, in a specific situation,
The object can be displayed as it moves,
It is possible to display effects corresponding to objects,
the sound output means is capable of outputting, in the specific situation, the specific sound corresponding to an object in the specific situation;
a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the object in the specific situation;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without significantly reducing visibility; furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the presentation effect is suitably enhanced by a specific sound that is output over an output period that is shorter than the display period of the object and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 48, Figure 50, Head 54, Figure 55, Figure 59, Figure 110, Figure 112, Figure 113, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the first situation;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed superimposed on each other;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by enlarging and displaying the effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, the third effect displayed together with the first effect or the second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object; and furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, a gaming machine can be provided which makes the object stand out without significantly reducing visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 121

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the first situation;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, the timing at which the first effect is made invisible differs from the timing at which the third effect is made invisible;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, the timing at which the second effect is made invisible is different from the timing at which the third effect is made invisible.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by enlarging and displaying the effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object is made to stand out without significantly reducing its visibility; and furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the third effect displayed together with the first or second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 121

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the first situation;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, the timing at which the first effect starts to be displayed and the timing at which the third effect starts to be displayed are different;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, the timing at which the second effect starts to be displayed is different from the timing at which the third effect starts to be displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by enlarging and displaying the effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object is made to stand out without significantly reducing its visibility; and furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the third effect displayed together with the first or second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 121

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the first situation;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation,
The timing at which the first effect starts to be displayed is different from the timing at which the third effect starts to be displayed,
The timing at which the first effect is hidden is different from the timing at which the third effect is hidden,
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation,
The timing at which the second effect starts to be displayed is different from the timing at which the third effect starts to be displayed,
The timing at which the second effect is hidden is different from the timing at which the third effect is hidden.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by enlarging and displaying the effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object is made to stand out without significantly reducing its visibility; and furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the third effect displayed together with the first or second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 121

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of brightness data;
The display means, in a specific situation,
The object can be displayed as it moves,
It is possible to display effects corresponding to objects,
a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
the performance control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on specific luminance data over a first period during a display period of an effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the specific luminance data over a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, it is possible to make the object stand out without significantly reducing visibility; furthermore, by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that changes the impression of an effect and enhances the presentation effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 109 to 117

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In the first situation,
an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to move;
an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to move;
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is a mode in which the object in the first situation is modeled using a first pattern;
the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is a mode in which the object in the second situation is modeled using a second pattern different from the first pattern;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by enlarging and displaying the effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without significantly reducing visibility; furthermore, by displaying different types of objects with effects at multiple times and varying the display pattern of the effects depending on the type of object, a gaming machine can be provided that attracts more attention to the objects and effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 83, Figure 85

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In the first situation,
an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed;
an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed;
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is made invisible before being enlarged and superimposed on the display area of the variable display information object showing the variable display situation;
the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is displayed so as not to overlap with the display area of the variably displayed information object during a first period of the display period, and is displayed so as to be enlarged and overlap with the display area of the variably displayed information object during a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by enlarging and displaying the effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without significantly reducing visibility; furthermore, by varying the display range of the effect for different types of objects with effects, a gaming machine can be provided that attracts more attention to the objects and effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 88, Figure 91

[Form 12]
A gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In the first situation,
an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed;
an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed;
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
The effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is hidden before being enlarged and superimposed on the display area of the reserved information object corresponding to the number of reserved memories;
the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is displayed so as not to overlap with the display area of the pending information object during a first period of the display period, and is displayed so as to be enlarged and overlap with the display area of the pending information object during a second period after the first period has elapsed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by enlarging and displaying the effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without significantly reducing visibility; furthermore, by varying the display range of the effect for different types of objects with effects, a gaming machine can be provided that attracts more attention to the objects and effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 88, Figure 91

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In the first situation,
an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed;
an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed;
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the first situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the second situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
The effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is hidden before being enlarged and superimposed on the display area of the launch instruction object that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area;
the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is displayed so as not to overlap with the display area of the launch instruction object during a first period of the display period, and is displayed so as to be enlarged and overlap with the display area of the launch instruction object during a second period after the first period has elapsed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by enlarging and displaying the effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without significantly reducing visibility; furthermore, by varying the display range of the effect for different types of objects with effects, a gaming machine can be provided that attracts more attention to the objects and effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 61, Figure 64, Figure 66, Figure 95, Figure 96

[Form 14]
A gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In the first situation,
an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed for a predetermined period of time;
an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed for a specific period longer than the predetermined period;
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be displayed;
the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is in a manner imitating the object in the first situation, while the effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is not in a manner imitating the object in the second situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, depending on the type of object for which the display period is set to differ, there are situations in which the effect is displayed to expand in a manner that resembles the object, and situations in which it is not, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that appropriately differs the degree of impression made on various objects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47

[Form 15]
A gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
In the first situation,
a first object corresponding to the first situation, the first object being composed of a predetermined number of single objects, is displayable;
an effect corresponding to the first object can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
a second object corresponding to the second situation, which is configured by a specific number of single objects that is greater than the predetermined number, can be displayed;
an effect corresponding to the second object can be displayed;
the first effect is an effect that imitates an object in the first situation, while the second effect is an effect that does not imitate an object in the second situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, depending on the type of object that is set to display in different numbers, there are situations in which the effect is displayed in an enlarged manner to resemble the object, and situations in which it is not, making it possible to provide a gadget that appropriately differs the degree of impression given to various objects.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47

[Form 16]
A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
At the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is enlarged and displayed at the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, an effect different from that when the effect identification information is in the reach mode is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and the start of variable display of the effect identification information and the fact that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect accompanying the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by displaying it in an appropriate manner depending on the situation.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes the effect identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 43, Figure 50, Figure 109, Figure 113

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information is not displayed in the reach state, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a predetermined state that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the predetermined mode, an effect different from that when the effect identification information is in the reach mode is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and it is possible to preferably highlight that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode or in a predetermined mode; furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by presenting it in a way that is appropriate for the situation; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes the effect identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 44, Figure 45, Figure 50, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
The effect identification information can be displayed in the reach state, and then displayed in a specific state that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state.
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the specific mode, the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode is not displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and it is possible to preferably highlight that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode or in a specific mode; furthermore, by varying whether or not the effect is displayed depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by presenting it in an appropriate manner according to the situation; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes the effect identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 51, Figure 52, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach mode, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed superimposed on each other,
The effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode are both modes that imitate the effect identification information.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode or a special mode can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect accompanying the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by displaying it in an appropriate manner depending on the situation.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode or a special mode to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes the effect identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 113, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
At the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner that suggests that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed superimposed on each other,
When the effect identification information is enlarged and displayed at the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, an effect different from that when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and the start of variable display of the effect identification information and the fact that the effect identification information is displayed in a special manner can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect accompanying the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by displaying it in an appropriate manner depending on the situation.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a special manner to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes the effect identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 43, Figure 59, Figure 109, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information is not displayed in the reach state, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a predetermined state that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach mode, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed superimposed,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the predetermined manner, an effect different from that when the effect identification information is displayed in the special manner is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the effect identification information is displayed in a special manner or in a predetermined manner can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by displaying it in an appropriate manner depending on the situation.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a special manner to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes the effect identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 44, 45, 59, 116, and 121

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach mode, the effect identification information can be displayed in a specific mode that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach mode, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed superimposed on each other,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the specific mode, the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode is not displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the effect identification information is displayed in a special manner can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by varying whether or not the effect is displayed depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by presenting it in an appropriate manner according to the situation.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a special manner to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes the effect identification information stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 51, 52, 59, 116, and 121

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound;
The display means
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the first situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
In the third situation,
an object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed to operate;
a fourth effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be displayed;
a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
a period during which the object in the third situation and the fourth effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the third situation and the fourth effect are displayed superimposed on each other;
the sound output means is capable of outputting, in the third situation, the specific sound corresponding to an object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the fourth effect;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, the third effect displayed together with the first effect or the second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, it is possible to make the object stand out while preventing a significant decrease in visibility; and furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the presentation effect is appropriately enhanced by a specific sound that is output over an output period that is shorter than the display period of the object and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 54, 55, 59, 114 to 116, and 121

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means;
Light emitting means;
a performance control means that can cause the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, can cause the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound, and can cause the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of luminance data;
The display means, in a specific situation,
The object can be displayed as it moves,
It is possible to display effects corresponding to objects,
the sound output means is capable of outputting, in the specific situation, the specific sound corresponding to an object in the specific situation;
a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the specific situation and the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation are displayed in a superimposed manner;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the object in the specific situation;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation;
the performance control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on specific luminance data over a first period during a display period of an effect corresponding to the object in the specific situation, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the specific luminance data over a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without significantly reducing visibility; further, the presentation effect is enhanced by a specific sound that is output over an output period that is shorter than the display period of the object but longer than the display period of the effect; and further, by switching brightness data during the display period of the effect, the impression of one effect can be changed, thereby providing a gaming machine that enhances the presentation effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 110, Figure 112, Figure 113, Figure 114, Figure 115, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound;
The display means
In the first situation,
an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed for a predetermined period of time;
an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed for a specific period longer than the predetermined period;
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be displayed;
In the third situation,
an object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed to operate;
an effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be enlarged and displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting, in the third situation, the specific sound corresponding to an object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation;
the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is an effect that imitates the object in the first situation;
The effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is not an effect that imitates the object in the second situation,
the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation is an effect that imitates the object in the third situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, depending on the type of object for which the display period is set to differ, there are situations in which the effect is displayed to expand in a manner that imitates the object and situations in which it is not, making it possible to vary the degree of impression made on various objects; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which the presentation effect is suitably enhanced by a specific sound that is output over an output period that is shorter than the display period of the object and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 47, 50, 59, 110, 111, 113, 116, and 121

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound;
The display means
In the first situation,
a first object corresponding to the first situation, the first object being composed of a predetermined number of single objects, is displayable;
an effect corresponding to the first object can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
a second object corresponding to the second situation, which is configured by a specific number of single objects that is greater than the predetermined number, can be displayed;
an effect corresponding to the second object can be displayed;
In the third situation,
an object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed to operate;
an effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be enlarged and displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting, in the third situation, the specific sound corresponding to an object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the object in the third situation;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation;
the first effect is an effect that imitates the first object,
The second effect does not imitate the second object,
the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation is an effect that imitates the object in the third situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, the presentation effect is preferably enhanced by a specific sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the object but longer than the display period of the effect; and further, by providing situations in which the effect is displayed in an enlarged manner to resemble the object and situations in which it is not, depending on the type of object that is set to have a different number of objects displayed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that differs in the degree of impression given to various objects.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 47, 50, 59, 110, 111, 113, 116, and 121

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a predetermined sound;
The display means
At the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is enlarged and displayed at the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode is displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting the predetermined sound when effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode,
an output period of the predetermined sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the reach mode;
an output period of the predetermined sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when displayed in the reach mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and it is possible to preferably highlight that the variable display of the effect identification information has begun and that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to make the effect identification information stand out without significantly reducing its visibility; further, by varying the type of effect associated with the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information in a way that is appropriate for the situation; and further, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that preferably enhances the presentation effect by outputting a predetermined sound for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the effect identification information when displayed in a reach mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 43, Figure 50, Figure 109, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a predetermined sound;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information is not displayed in the reach state, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a predetermined state that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the predetermined manner, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach manner is displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting the predetermined sound when effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode,
an output period of the predetermined sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the reach mode;
an output period of the predetermined sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when displayed in the reach mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably highlight that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode or in a predetermined mode; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, the effect identification information is made to stand out without significantly reducing its visibility; further, by varying the type of effect associated with the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information in a suitable manner according to the situation; and further, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suitably enhances the presentation effect by outputting a predetermined sound for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the effect identification information when displayed in a reach mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 44, Figure 45, Figure 50, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a predetermined sound;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
The effect identification information can be displayed in the reach state, and then displayed in a specific state that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state.
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the specific mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode is not displayed,
the sound output means is capable of outputting the predetermined sound when effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode,
an output period of the predetermined sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the reach mode;
an output period of the predetermined sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when displayed in the reach mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and it is possible to preferably highlight that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode or in a specific mode; further, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, the effect identification information is made to stand out without significantly reducing its visibility; further, by varying whether or not the effect is displayed depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by presenting it in an appropriate manner according to the situation; and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that preferably enhances the presentation effect by outputting a predetermined sound for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the effect when displayed in a reach mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 51, Figure 52, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a predetermined sound;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach mode can be enlarged and displayed,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach mode, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed superimposed on each other,
The effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode are both modes that imitate the effect identification information,
the sound output means is capable of outputting the predetermined sound when effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode,
an output period of the predetermined sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the reach mode;
an output period of the predetermined sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when displayed in the reach mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably highlight that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode or a special mode; further, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode or a special mode to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to make the effect identification information stand out without significantly reducing its visibility; further, by varying the type of effect associated with the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information in a suitable manner according to the situation; and further, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suitably enhances the effect by outputting a predetermined sound for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the effect when displayed in a reach mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 113, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound;
The display means
At the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner that suggests that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed superimposed,
When the effect identification information is enlarged and displayed at the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode is displayed;
the sound output means is capable of outputting the specific sound when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode;
the output period of the specific sound is shorter than the display period of the effect identification information displayed in the special mode,
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when displayed in the special mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and the start of variable display of the effect identification information and the fact that the effect identification information is displayed in a special mode can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a special mode to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, the effect identification information is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility.Furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by presenting it in an appropriate way according to the situation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the presentation effect is suitably enhanced by a specific sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the effect when displayed in a special mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 43, Figure 59, Figure 109, Figure 116, Figure 121

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information is not displayed in the reach state, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a predetermined state that suggests that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach mode, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed superimposed on each other,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the predetermined manner, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the special manner is displayed,
the sound output means is capable of outputting the specific sound when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode;
the output period of the specific sound is shorter than the display period of the effect identification information displayed in the special mode,
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when displayed in the special mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the effect identification information is displayed in a special mode or in a predetermined mode can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a special mode to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, the effect identification information is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by varying the type of effect associated with the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by presenting it in an appropriate way according to the situation; and further, a gaming machine can be provided in which the presentation effect is suitably enhanced by a specific sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the effect when displayed in a special mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 44, Figure 45, Figure 59, Figure 16, Figure 121

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a sound output means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the sound output means to output a plurality of types of sounds including a specific sound;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach mode, the effect identification information can be displayed in a specific mode that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach mode, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed superimposed on each other,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the specific mode, the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode is not displayed,
the sound output means is capable of outputting the specific sound when effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode,
an output period of the specific sound is shorter than a display period of the effect identification information displayed in the reach mode;
an output period of the specific sound is longer than a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when displayed in the reach mode;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and the fact that the effect identification information is displayed in a special mode can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a special mode to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, the effect identification information is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility.Furthermore, by varying whether or not the effect is displayed depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by presenting it in an appropriate manner according to the situation.Furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the presentation effect is suitably enhanced by a predetermined sound that is output for an output period that is shorter than the display period of the effect when displayed in a reach mode and longer than the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 16, 50, 51, 52, 59, and 121

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including objects on the display means according to a performance situation, and capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of brightness data;
The display means
In a first situation, an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the first situation;
In a second situation, an object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed to move for a predetermined period of time in the second situation;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the first situation, a first effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the second situation, a second effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be enlarged and displayed;
a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be displayed together with the first effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the first situation and after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation, and can be displayed together with the second effect after a predetermined period has elapsed in the second situation;
In the third situation,
an object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed to operate;
a fourth effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be displayed;
a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the first effect in the first situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object and the second effect in the second situation are displayed superimposed on each other,
a period during which the object in the third situation and the fourth effect are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the object in the third situation and the fourth effect are displayed superimposed on each other;
the performance control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on specific luminance data over a first period during a display period of the fourth effect, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the specific luminance data over a second period after the first period has elapsed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without significantly reducing visibility; furthermore, a third effect displayed together with the first effect or the second effect synergistically enhances the impression of the object; and furthermore, by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect, the impression of one effect can be changed, thereby providing a gaming machine with enhanced presentation effects.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 54, 55, 50, 59, 113 to 116, and 121

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of brightness data;
The display means
In the first situation,
an object corresponding to the first situation can be displayed for a predetermined period of time;
an effect corresponding to the object in the first situation can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
The object corresponding to the second situation can be displayed for a specific period longer than a predetermined period,
an effect corresponding to the object in the second situation can be displayed;
In the third situation,
an object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed to operate;
an effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be enlarged and displayed;
the performance control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on specific luminance data over a first period during a display period of an effect corresponding to the object in the third situation, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the specific luminance data over a second period after the first period has elapsed;
the effect corresponding to the object in the first situation is an effect that imitates the object in the first situation;
The effect corresponding to the object in the second situation is not an effect that imitates the object in the second situation,
the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation is an effect that imitates the object in the third situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect, which is displayed so as to expand in a manner that imitates the object, to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object is made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect, the impression of a single effect is changed to enhance the presentation effect; and further, by setting different display periods depending on the type of object, there are situations in which the effect is displayed so as to expand in a manner that imitates the object and situations in which it is not, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the degree of impression given to various objects is varied.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 47, 50, 59, 110, 111, 113, 116, and 121

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of brightness data;
The display means
In the first situation,
a first object corresponding to the first situation, the first object being composed of a predetermined number of single objects, is displayable;
a first effect corresponding to the first object can be enlarged and displayed;
In the second situation,
a second object corresponding to the second situation, which is configured by a specific number of single objects that is greater than the predetermined number, can be displayed;
a second effect corresponding to the second object can be displayed;
In the third situation,
an object corresponding to the third situation can be displayed to operate;
an effect corresponding to the object in the third situation can be enlarged and displayed;
the performance control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on specific luminance data over a first period during a display period of an effect corresponding to the object in the third situation, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the specific luminance data over a second period after the first period has elapsed;
the first effect is an effect that imitates the first object,
The second effect does not imitate the second object,
the effect corresponding to the object in the third situation is an effect that imitates the object in the third situation;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target object, the presence of the object itself is enhanced, and the display of the object can be made to stand out in an appropriate manner; further, by setting the display period of the effect, which is displayed so as to expand in a manner that imitates the object, to be shorter than the display period of the object, the object can be made to stand out without a significant decrease in visibility; further, by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect, the impression of a single effect can be changed to enhance the presentation effect; and further, by providing situations in which the effect is displayed so as to expand in a manner that imitates the object and situations in which it is not, depending on the type of object that is set to be displayed in different numbers, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that differs in the degree of impression given to various objects.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 47, 50, 59, 110, 111, 113, 116, and 121

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
Light emitting means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of brightness data;
The display means
At the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is enlarged and displayed at the timing when the variable display of the effect identification information is started, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode is displayed;
the effect control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on predetermined luminance data over a first period during a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become the reach mode, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the predetermined luminance data over a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and it is possible to preferably highlight that the variable display of the effect identification information has begun and that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode; further, by setting the display period of the effect when the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to make the effect identification information stand out without significantly reducing its visibility; further, by varying the type of effect associated with the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by displaying it in a way that is appropriate for the situation; and further, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that enhances the presentation effect by changing the impression of one effect by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 43, Figure 50, Figure 109, Figure 113, Figure 121

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
Light emitting means;
a performance control means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images including objects on the display means according to a performance situation, and capable of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of brightness data;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information is not displayed in the reach state, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a predetermined state that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the predetermined manner, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach manner is displayed;
the effect control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on predetermined luminance data over a first period during a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the predetermined luminance data over a second period after the first period has elapsed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and it is possible to preferably highlight that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode or in a predetermined mode; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to make the effect identification information stand out without significantly reducing its visibility; furthermore, by varying the type of effect associated with the effect identification information depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by displaying it in a way that is appropriate for the situation; and furthermore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that changes the impression of one effect by switching brightness data during the display period of the effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 44, Figure 45, Figure 50, Figure 121

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
Light emitting means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of brightness data;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
The effect identification information can be displayed in the reach state, and then displayed in a specific state that suggests that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state.
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the specific mode, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information when the effect identification information is displayed in the reach mode is not displayed,
the effect control means causes the light emitting means to emit light based on predetermined luminance data over a first period during a display period of the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become the reach mode, and causes the light emitting means to emit light based on luminance data different from the predetermined luminance data over a second period after the first period has elapsed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and it is possible to preferably highlight that the effect identification information is displayed in a reach mode or in a specific mode; furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, it is possible to make the effect identification information stand out without significantly reducing its visibility; furthermore, by varying whether or not the effect is displayed depending on the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the effect identification information by presenting it in an appropriate manner according to the situation; and furthermore, by switching the brightness data during the display period of the effect, it is possible to change the impression of an effect and provide a gaming machine that enhances the effect.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 51, Figure 52, Figure 121

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
Light emitting means;
a performance control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation, and for causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a plurality of types of brightness data;
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started, the effect identification information can be displayed in a reach mode,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, an effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the reach state can be enlarged and displayed,
After displaying the effect identification information in the reach mode, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special mode that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode can be enlarged and displayed.
a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information that has become a reach state and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become a reach state are displayed in a superimposed manner,
a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed without being superimposed on each other is longer than a period during which the effect identification information in the special mode and the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode are displayed superimposed on each other,
The light emitting means is
When the effect identification information is displayed in the reach state, light can be emitted based on special brightness data that is not related to the effect corresponding to the effect identification information that has become the reach state,
When the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode, light can be emitted based on specific luminance data related to the effect corresponding to the effect identification information in the special mode.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying an enlarged effect corresponding to the target effect identification information, the presence of the effect identification information itself is enhanced, and it is possible to preferably highlight that the effect identification information is in a reach state or a special state.Furthermore, by setting the display period of the effect to be shorter than the display period of the effect identification information, the effect identification information is made to stand out without significantly reducing its visibility, and further, by illuminating the light-emitting means based on brightness data corresponding to the display status of the effect identification information, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that attracts more attention to the effect identification information in a preferred manner.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 50, Figure 59, Figure 116, Figure 121, Figure 129

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
The display means, in the advantageous state,
A first object that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed;
A second object that prompts the launch of the game medium into the specific area can be displayed in a manner different from that of the first object,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to instruct the ejection of game media appropriately by using an object that prompts the ejection of game media into two types of specific areas with different display patterns.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 71, Figure 99

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
When the game medium enters a specific area in the game area in the normal state, a first object can be displayed to prompt the game medium to be launched into a predetermined area in the game area;
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed that prompts firing toward the predetermined area,
The first object starts to be displayed without any effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect.
The second object is initially displayed without any effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to instruct the ejection of game media in a suitable manner by using an object that prompts the ejection of game media into two types of predetermined areas with different display patterns depending on the situation.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 76, Figure 77, Figure 130

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
In the advantageous state, a first object can be displayed that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area,
When the ball is not controlled to the advantageous state but is controlled to the normal state in the special state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the ball to be fired toward a predetermined area in the game area,
The first object starts to be displayed without any effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect.
The second object is initially displayed without any effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by differentiating the display patterns of objects that prompt the launch of gaming media into a specific area and objects that prompt the launch of gaming media into a predetermined area, it is possible to instruct the launch of gaming media in an appropriate manner.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 71, Figure 76

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
The effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined effect that suggests an expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in a normal state,
The display means
a first object that resembles the operation means can be displayed before the predetermined effect is executed;
In the advantageous state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 47, 56, 57, and 71

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined effect that suggests an expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in the special state,
The display means
a first object that resembles the operation means can be displayed before the predetermined effect is executed;
In the advantageous state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 61, Figure 62, Figure 71

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
The effect control means is capable of executing a specific effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in a normal state,
The display means
a first object that resembles the operation means can be displayed before the specific effect is executed;
In the advantageous state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 58, Figure 71

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a specific effect that notifies whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in the special state,
The display means is
a first object that resembles the operation means can be displayed before the specific effect is executed;
In the advantageous state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 67, Figure 71

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a special effect that notifies the player that the advantageous state will be controlled to the special state by using the operation means in the advantageous state,
The display means
a first object imitating the operation means can be displayed before the special effect is executed;
In the advantageous state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains there, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 71, Figure 72, Figure 79

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation;
The display means
After variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner to notify that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the advantageous state, a predetermined object can be displayed to prompt the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area,
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode is displayed with an appearance effect, and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
The predetermined object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect that is different from when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that a favorable state is being controlled by a special type of presentation identification information that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, and further, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area by a specified object that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 59, Figure 71

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the special state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the advantageous state, a predetermined object can be displayed to prompt the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area,
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode is displayed with an appearance effect, and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
The predetermined object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect that is different from when the effect identification information is displayed in a special mode.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that a favorable state is being controlled by a special type of presentation identification information that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, and further, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area by a specified object that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 68, Figure 71

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner to notify that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state,
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the special state, the effect identification information can be displayed in the special manner,
In the advantageous state, a predetermined object can be displayed to prompt the launch of the game medium to a specific area in the game area,
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode in the normal state is displayed with an appearance effect, and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
The effect identification information displayed in the special manner in the special state is displayed with an appearance effect, and then displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
the predetermined object is started to be displayed without an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect that is different from when the effect identification information is displayed in the special manner in the normal state or the special state;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that a favorable state is being controlled by a special type of presentation identification information that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, and further, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area by a specified object that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 59, Figure 68, Figure 71

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
When the display means is controlled to the advantageous state after variable display of the effect identification information has started in the normal state,
a first object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed;
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state can be suitably indicated by a first object whose display pattern differs when it appears and when it remains, and further, the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area can be suitably instructed by a second object whose display pattern differs when it appears and when it remains.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 69

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
When the display means is controlled to the advantageous state after variable display of the effect identification information has started in the special state,
a first object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed;
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object is displayed with a different stay effect than the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state can be suitably indicated by a first object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, and further, the second object having a different display pattern from the first object can suitably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 70

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
When the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state and then controlled to the first advantageous state,
a first object corresponding to the name of the first advantageous state can be displayed;
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed;
When the state is controlled to a second advantageous state after the variable display of the effect identification information has started in the special state, a third object corresponding to the name of the second advantageous state can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object is displayed without an appearance effect, and then with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
The third object is displayed with an appearance effect, and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object and the third object, which have different display patterns when they appear and when they remain, can suitably indicate the type of advantageous state, and further, the second object, which has different display patterns when it appears and when it remains, can suitably instruct the launch of gaming media into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 70, Figure 71

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
When the display means is controlled to the advantageous state after variable display of the effect identification information has started in the normal state,
a first object corresponding to the name of the special state can be displayed;
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can suitably indicate that it is possible to play in a special state, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can suitably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 71, Figure 75

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
When the display means is controlled to the advantageous state after variable display of the effect identification information has started in the special state,
a first object corresponding to the name of the special state can be displayed;
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object is displayed with a different stay effect than the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can suitably indicate that it is possible to continue playing in a special state, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern from the first object, can suitably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specific area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 71, Figure 75

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner to notify that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state,
After displaying the effect identification information in the special mode,
a first object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed;
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed;
a third object corresponding to the name of the special state can be displayed;
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode is displayed with an appearance effect, and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object is started to be displayed without an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from that when the effect identification information is displayed in a special manner or when the first object is displayed,
The third object is displayed with an appearance effect, and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that the advantageous state is being controlled by a special type of presentation identification information that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, and furthermore, it is possible to preferably indicate the type of advantageous state by a first object that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, and furthermore, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of gaming media into a specific area by a second object that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, and furthermore, it is possible to preferably indicate that playing in a special state is possible by a third object that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 59, Figure 69, Figure 75

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of form 58 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the special state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the special state, a first object can be displayed that prompts the launch of the game medium into a specific area in the game area,
After displaying the effect identification information in the special mode,
a second object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed;
a third object corresponding to the name of the special state can be displayed;
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode is displayed with an appearance effect, and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
the first object is displayed with a stay effect that is different from when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode,
the second object is displayed with an appearance effect and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The third object is displayed with an appearance effect, and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that the advantageous state is being controlled by special mode presentation identification information that has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, and further, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of gaming media into a specific area by using a first object that has different effects when the presentation identification information is displayed in a special mode and when it remains, and further, it is possible to preferably indicate the type of advantageous state by using a second object that has different display patterns when it appears and when it remains, and further, it is possible to preferably indicate that it is possible to play in a special state by using a third object that has different display patterns when it appears and when it remains.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 68, Figure 70, Figure 75

[Form 59]
The gaming machine of form 59 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined effect that suggests an expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in the normal state,
The display means
a first object that resembles the operation means can be displayed before the predetermined effect is executed;
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 46, Figure 47, Figure 76

[Form 60]
The gaming machine of form 60 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a specific effect that notifies whether or not the normal state is controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means,
The display means
a first object that resembles the operation means can be displayed before the specific effect is executed;
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 58, Figure 76

[Form 61]
The gaming machine of form 61 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a specific effect that notifies whether or not the special state is controlled to the advantageous state by using the operation means in the special state,
The display means
a first object that resembles the operation means can be displayed before the specific effect is executed;
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 67, Figure 76

[Form 62]
The gaming machine of form 62 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a special effect that notifies the player that the advantageous state will be controlled to the special state by using the operation means in the advantageous state,
The display means
a first object imitating the operation means can be displayed before the special effect is executed;
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can effectively prompt an action on the operating means, and further, the second object, which has a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, can effectively instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 72, Figure 76

[Form 63]
The gaming machine of form 63 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
After the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state, the effect identification information can be displayed in a special manner to notify that the effect identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a predetermined object can be displayed to prompt the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area,
The effect identification information displayed in the special mode is displayed with an appearance effect, and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect.
The predetermined object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect that is different from when the effect identification information is displayed in the special mode.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify that the state is controlled to an advantageous state by a special type of presentation identification information whose display pattern differs when it appears and when it remains, and further, it is possible to preferably instruct the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area by a second object whose display pattern differs when it appears and when it remains.
Corresponding description: Figure 59, Figure 76

[Form 64]
The gaming machine of form 64 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state after variable display of the effect identification information has started in the normal state, a first object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed;
When the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed that prompts the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state can be suitably indicated by a first object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, and further, the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area can be suitably instructed by a second object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains.
Corresponding description: Figure 69, Figure 76

[Form 65]
The gaming machine of form 65 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
In the special state, the display means
When the advantageous state is reached after the variable display of the effect identification information has started, a first object corresponding to the name of the advantageous state can be displayed;
When the ball is not controlled to the advantageous state but is controlled to the normal state, a second object can be displayed to prompt the ball to be fired into a predetermined area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The second object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state can be suitably indicated by a first object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains, and further, the launch of a gaming medium into a specified area can be suitably instructed by a second object having a different display pattern when it appears and when it remains.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 70, Figure 76

[Form 66]
The gaming machine of form 66 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
When the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state and then the state is controlled to a first advantageous state, a first object corresponding to the name of the first advantageous state can be displayed;
When the game is controlled to a second advantageous state after the variable display of the effect identification information has started in the special state, a second object corresponding to the name of the second advantageous state can be displayed;
When the special state is not controlled to the second advantageous state but controlled to the normal state, a third object can be displayed to prompt the player to launch the ball into a predetermined area in the game area,
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
the second object is displayed with an appearance effect and then with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
The third object starts to be displayed without an appearance effect, and is then displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object or the second object.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the type of advantageous state can be suitably indicated by the first object and the second object, which have different display patterns when they appear and when they remain, and further, the third object, which has different display patterns when it appears and when it remains, can suitably instruct the launch of gaming media into a specified area.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 69, Figure 70, Figure 76

[Form 67]
The gaming machine of form 67 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
In a normal state, the performance control means
A predetermined effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed using the operation means,
A specific effect can be executed by using the operation means to notify whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
the display means is capable of displaying a predetermined object simulating the operation means at a first timing before the predetermined effect is executed and at a second timing before the specific effect is executed;
The predetermined object at the first timing starts to be displayed with a first appearance effect, and thereafter is displayed with a stay effect,
The predetermined object at the second timing starts to be displayed accompanied by a second appearance effect, and thereafter is displayed accompanied by a stay effect,
a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the second appearance effect is longer than a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the first appearance effect;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the effect at the time of appearance different between the first timing and the second timing, it is possible to create a difference in the degree of impression given to the specified object and increase interest, and furthermore, by making the effect at the time of stay the same, it is possible to appropriately encourage operation of the operating means at either timing.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 47, 56 to 58

[Form 68]
The gaming machine of form 68 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The performance control means, in the special state,
A predetermined effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed using the operation means,
A specific effect can be executed by using the operation means to notify whether or not the advantageous state is being controlled,
the display means is capable of displaying a predetermined object simulating the operation means at a first timing before the predetermined effect is executed and at a second timing before the specific effect is executed;
The predetermined object at the first timing starts to be displayed with a first appearance effect, and thereafter is displayed with a stay effect,
The predetermined object at the second timing starts to be displayed accompanied by a second appearance effect, and thereafter is displayed accompanied by a stay effect,
a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the second appearance effect is longer than a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the first appearance effect;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the effect at the time of appearance different between the first timing and the second timing, it is possible to create a difference in the degree of impression given to the specified object and increase interest, and furthermore, by making the effect at the time of stay the same, it is possible to appropriately encourage operation of the operating means at either timing.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 61, Figure 62, Figure 66, Figure 67, Figure 117, Figure 121

[Form 69]
The gaming machine of form 69 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
an operating means operable by a player;
A display means;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The performance control means
A first effect can be executed in the normal state by using the operation means, which indicates the degree of expectation that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
A second effect can be executed in the normal state by using the operation means to notify whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the special state, a third effect can be executed by using the operation means to suggest the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state,
A fourth effect can be executed in the special state by using the operation means to notify whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state.
the display means is capable of displaying a predetermined object simulating the operation means at a first timing before the first performance is executed, a second timing before the second performance is executed, a third timing before the third performance is executed, and a fourth timing before the fourth performance is executed;
the predetermined object at the first timing is displayed with a first appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
the predetermined object at the second timing is displayed with a second appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
the predetermined object at the third timing is displayed with a first appearance effect and then with a stay effect;
the predetermined object at the fourth timing is displayed with a second appearance effect, and then with a stay effect;
a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the second appearance effect is longer than a period during which the predetermined object is displayed accompanied by the first appearance effect;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the effect when the object appears depending on the timing, the degree of impression given to the specified object is varied, increasing interest, and furthermore, by standardizing the effect when the object is in place, it is possible to appropriately prompt the user to operate the operating means at any timing.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 46, 47, 56 to 58, 61, 62, 67, 117, and 121

[Form 70]
The gaming machine of form 70 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
The performance control means
A predetermined effect can be executed during the period when the variable display is being performed,
A demonstration effect can be performed during a period when the variable display is not being performed,
The display means
When the predetermined effect is executed, a first object and a first effect corresponding to the first object can be displayed;
When the demonstration rendering is executed, a second object and a second effect corresponding to the second object can be displayed;
a second object and a second effect cannot be displayed during the execution period of the predetermined effect, while a first object and a first effect can be displayed during the execution period of the demonstration effect;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the second object and the second effect that are displayed only during the execution period of the demonstration performance enhance the special feeling of the demonstration performance, and a gaming machine can be provided that allows players to actively watch the demonstration performance.
Corresponding drawing: None (see variant 6)

[Form 71]
The gaming machine of form 71 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which variable display is not being performed,
The display means
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to control to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed,
the number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a special variable display pattern having the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to control to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enlivened, and further, by increasing the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the special variable display pattern compared to during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the special variable display pattern can be made even more enlivened.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 34, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 72]
The gaming machine of form 72 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which variable display is not being performed,
The display means
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to control to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed,
The number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established,
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a special variable display pattern having the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to control to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enlivened, and further, by increasing the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the special variable display pattern compared to during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the special variable display pattern can be made even more enlivened.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 34, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 73]
The gaming machine of form 73 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which variable display is not being performed,
The display means
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to control to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed,
the number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established;
The number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established,
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a special variable display pattern having the largest number of types of notice objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to control to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a special variable display pattern having the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to control to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enlivened, and further, by increasing the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the special variable display pattern or the special variable display pattern than during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the special variable display pattern or the special variable display pattern can be made even more enlivened.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 34, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 74]
The gaming machine of form 74 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which variable display is not being performed,
The display means
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to not being controlled to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed,
The number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established,
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a predetermined variable display pattern with the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns corresponding to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enhanced, and further, by increasing the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the predetermined variable display pattern compared to during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the predetermined variable display pattern can be suitably enhanced.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 32, 33, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 75]
The gaming machine of form 75 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which variable display is not being performed,
The display means
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to not being controlled to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed,
The number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established,
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a specific variable display pattern with the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns that correspond to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enlivened, and further, by making the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern larger than during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern can be suitably enlivened.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 32, 33, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 76]
The gaming machine of form 76 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for determining a variable display pattern when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which variable display is not being performed,
The display means
During a variable display period based on a variable display pattern corresponding to not being controlled to the advantageous state determined by the game control means, a plurality of preview objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of preview objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of non-announcement objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of non-announcement objects can be displayed,
The number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established,
The number of types of preview objects that can be displayed during the variable display varies depending on the type of variable display pattern that corresponds to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established,
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a predetermined variable display pattern with the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns that correspond to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the first start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
the number of types of effects displayed during a variable display period based on a specific variable display pattern with the largest number of types of preview objects among the variable display patterns that correspond to not being controlled to the advantageous state that can be determined by the game control means when the second start condition is established is greater than the number of types of effects displayed during an execution period of the demonstration performance;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying a plurality of effects even during the demonstration performance, the demonstration performance can be suitably enhanced, and further, by increasing the number of effects that can be displayed during the variable display based on the predetermined variable display pattern or the specific variable display pattern than during the demonstration performance, the variable display based on the predetermined variable display pattern or the specific variable display pattern can be further enhanced.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 24, 32, 33, 35, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 77]
The gaming machine of form 77 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for starting a variable display when a first start condition or a second start condition is satisfied;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
The game control means can control the game to a first advantageous state or a second advantageous state after the variable display that started based on the establishment of the first start condition ends,
the performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which variable display is not being performed,
The display means
In the first advantageous state, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed;
In the second advantageous state, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed,
the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the control period of the first advantageous state is greater than the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the execution period of the demonstration performance;
The number of types of effects that the display means can display during the control period of the second advantageous state is greater than the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the execution period of the demonstration performance.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the demonstration performance can be enhanced by displaying multiple effects even during the demonstration performance, and further, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be enhanced by increasing the number of effects that can be displayed in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state compared to during the demonstration performance.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 25, 36, 81, and 82

[Form 78]
The gaming machine of form 78 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a game control means for starting a variable display when a first start condition or a second start condition is satisfied;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
The game control means is capable of controlling the game to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state after the variable display that started based on the establishment of the second start condition ends,
the performance control means is capable of executing a demonstration performance during a period in which variable display is not being performed,
The display means
In the first advantageous state, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed;
In the second advantageous state, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed;
During the execution period of the demonstration performance, a plurality of objects and effects corresponding to each of the plurality of objects can be displayed,
the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the control period of the first advantageous state is greater than the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the execution period of the demonstration performance;
The number of types of effects that the display means can display during the control period of the second advantageous state is greater than the number of types of effects that the display means can display during the execution period of the demonstration performance.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the demonstration performance can be enhanced by displaying multiple effects even during the demonstration performance, and further, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be enhanced by increasing the number of effects that can be displayed in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state compared to during the demonstration performance.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 131, Variation 7

The following describes how to implement the present invention based on examples.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided in the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols, and the small symbols are displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, right-hit notification images that encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation, and remaining time-saving display that shows the number of remaining time-saving rounds may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) effect images (object images) such as characters, thereby preventing overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the effect images, thereby preventing overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol makes it possible to determine whether or not a variably displayed symbol is currently being displayed, even if the decorative symbol is difficult to recognize, such as when the effect content, including the variably displayed decorative symbol, momentarily disappears from the screen, or when the movable body 32 obscures all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Based on receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Based on receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a special symbol pending memory display area 5U is provided that is common to the first and second special symbols. However, a first special symbol pending memory display area that displays a first pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol pending memory display area that displays a second pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending may also be provided separately. In this embodiment, the special symbol pending memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a pending display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game is in a normal state, and a display area that displays a pending display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability variable state. Furthermore, the active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variation state.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, thereby creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in a tilted position, thereby creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out, and the second special game can be initiated. The variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it changes between a closed and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided a first special variable winning ball device 7A and a second special variable winning ball device 7B, each with a large winning opening. The first special variable winning ball device 7A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), forming a first large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open and closed state by the large winning opening door. The second special variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see Figure 2), forming a second large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open and closed state by the large winning opening door.

In the first special variable winning ball device 7A, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the first large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the first large prize opening. On the other hand, in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the first large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the first large prize opening.

Similarly, in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, when the solenoid 83 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the second large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the second large prize opening. On the other hand, in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, when the solenoid 83 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the second large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the second large prize opening.

A gaming ball that enters the first large prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23 (see Figure 2), and a gaming ball that enters the second large prize opening is detected by the second count switch 24 (see Figure 2). When a gaming ball is detected by the first count switch 23 or the second count switch 24, that is, when a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 15) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

In this embodiment, the gaming area is composed of a left gaming area 2L, which is formed to the left of the image display device 5 and where gaming balls can flow down to enter the general winning opening 10 and the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a right gaming area 2R, which is formed to the right of the image display device 5 and where gaming balls can flow down to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the first and second large winning openings formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and can pass through the passing gate 41.

In this embodiment, the normal state is a state in which the player primarily shoots game balls toward the left game area 2L, while the time-saving state, probability variation state, and jackpot game state are states in which the player shoots game balls toward the right game area 2R.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, with side lamps 9b provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the gaming board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 that operates in response to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1), and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. An attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the gaming board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the gaming board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are each composed of an LED. The various lamps will be described later.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In special game games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol will vary depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "miss."

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the first and second large prize openings formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 are opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize openings reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize openings can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize openings are opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (e.g., 10 or 6 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

In this embodiment, the large prize opening that opens in a specific round (for example, the sixth round) varies depending on the type of jackpot. In the case of a jackpot type in which the second prize opening opens in that specific round, the game ball enters the second large prize opening. In other words, based on this detection by the second count switch 24, the game state is controlled to a high probability, high base state after the jackpot game ends.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9, the movement of the movable body 32, or as effects using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches used to detect game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), first count switch 23, and second count switch 24) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoids 82 and 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoids 82 and 83 for the large prize opening door.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is also provided with a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is connected to a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on the receipt of a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor provided in a payout passage through which the game balls paid out by the payout device pass. The payout device can be stopped depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor.

The payout control board is also connected to a handle sensor for detecting the amount of operation by the player and a touch ring (touch sensor) for detecting whether the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on signals input from these sensors, the payout control board controls the launching device that can launch game balls onto the game board 2. A signal indicating whether the touch ring has been detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device are input from the payout control board to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area switch for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

As shown in FIG. 3, the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, and therefore the VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. The layer image drawing areas are classified into upper, middle, and lower levels, with images in higher layer image drawing areas being set with a higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layer drawing areas being set with a lower display priority on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 4, the VRAM area includes a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as an image of Layer 1, a Layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern as an image of Layer 2, a Layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as an image of Layer 3, a Layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an enlarged effect image as an image of Layer 4, a Layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative effect image as an image of Layer 5, a Layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a break precursor image (glass plate image, etc.) as an image of Layer 6, and a Layer 7 image for drawing and arranging a glass plate image A as an image to be broken that is displayed in place of the glass plate image and a Layer 8 image for drawing and arranging an image to be displayed when the glass plate image A is broken. a Layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and placing fragment images resulting from this; a Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and placing an action effect image (described later) as an image on Layer 8; a Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and placing a whiteout image 003SG303 (described later) as an image on Layer 9; a Layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and placing an operation prompt image (described later) as an image on Layer 10; a Layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and placing variable display compatible displays (hold display and active display) as an image on Layer 11; a Layer 12 image drawing area for drawing and placing images for right-hit display and left-hit display (described later) as an image on Layer 12; and a Layer 13 image drawing area for drawing and placing a small symbol (fourth symbol) as an image on Layer 13.

In this embodiment, the enlargement effect refers to an image that imitates (is similar to) the target image in each effect and is enlarged over time. The image has a higher transparency than the target image, and the transparency gradually increases as the image enlarges (see Figures 83 to 97). In this embodiment, the decorative effect refers to an image that differs in shape from the target image in each effect and has the same transparency as the target image at least at the start of display (0% transparency) (see Figures 98 and 99). Furthermore, the development costs of the enlargement effect are lower than those of the decorative effect. Specifically, the creation of decorative effects requires the preparation of dedicated material data and then processing that material data appropriately, so the creation of the image requires a certain amount of time. However, the enlargement effect can be created by reusing the material data of decorative patterns, so it is an image that can be created in a short period of time. In other words, the enlargement effect is an image that can effectively highlight the target image you want to draw attention to, while requiring low development costs.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in these Layer 1 to Layer 13 image drawing areas. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area are set to the lowest display priority, images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area are set to a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area are set to a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area are set to a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area are set to a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 4 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area are set to a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area, and images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area are set to a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area. images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 12 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area, and images drawn in the layer 13 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 12 image drawing area.

In other words, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image displayed at the lowest level in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area in the image display device 5. an image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is an image that is displayed (has priority display) above an image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area on the image display device 5; an image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is an image that is displayed (has priority display) above an image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area on the image display device 5; an image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is an image that is displayed (has priority display) above an image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area on the image display device 5; an image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is an image that is displayed (has priority display) above an image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area on the image display device 5; an image drawn in the layer 12 image drawing area is an image that is displayed (has priority display) above an image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area on the image display device 5; and an image drawn in the layer 13 image drawing area is an image that is displayed at the topmost level on the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 6(A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. With the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type will be selected if the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), as shown in Figure 6 (B) for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 6(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and determined jackpot type that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and determined jackpot type that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and determined jackpot type that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot C."

Command 8F00H is a symbol determination command that specifies the stopping (determining) of the decorative symbol variation in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low-probability, low-base state, normal state), command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state), and command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high-probability, high-base state, probability variable state). Furthermore, the high probability, high base state may simply be referred to as the "high probability state."

Command A0XXH is a start-of-jackpot command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end-of-jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result designation command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state (e.g., "0" to "10"), as described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that a first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that a second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B. Command B300H is a large prize opening entry designation command that notifies that 15 prize balls will be paid out when a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first or second large prize opening of the special variable prize ball device 7 is detected by the first count switch 23 or second count switch 24, resulting in a prize.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the prize-winning judgment result) that indicate the content of the winning judgment result. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" as a winning judgment result, and the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden probability win). Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates whether the random number value used to determine the variation pattern will be a "non-reach," "super reach," or "other (normal reach)" variation pattern as a winning judgment result.

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command D000H is a V entry notification command for notifying that a game ball has entered the second large entry slot during a jackpot game, i.e., that a game ball has been detected by the second count switch 24. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the detection of a game ball by the second count switch 24 during a jackpot game may be referred to as a "V entry." In this embodiment, "V entry" refers to the execution of both time-saving control and probability variable control in the high base state after the end of the jackpot game in which the entry occurred (control to a high probability, high base state).

Command 9F00H is a customer waiting demo display specification command that specifies the execution of a customer waiting demonstration display (customer waiting demo).

Note that the commands shown in Figure 6 (A) are just examples, and some of these commands may not be included, different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added. For example, it may be possible to provide a prize ball number notification command that enables the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each winning slot, a gate passage notification command that notifies the game ball that it has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command that notifies the remaining number of variable display times at which the probability change control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 7, on the main board 11, the following numerical data is controlled to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result; random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot; random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern; random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern; random number value MR5 for determining the normal symbol display result; and random number value MR6 for determining the initial value of random number value MR5. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be configured to count the numerical data representing some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR6. The CPU 103 may also count the numerical data representing some of the random number values MR1 to MR6 by updating various numerical data using software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result of a special symbol or other game in a special symbol game as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "jackpot A", "jackpot B", or "jackpot C" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "99", for example.

The random number value MR3 used to determine the type of variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is a random number value used to determine whether the type of variation pattern is "non-reach," "normal reach," or "super reach," and takes a value in the range of "0" to "4095," for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special and decorative symbols, as one of several pre-prepared types, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "255", for example.

The random number value MR5 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss," and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

The random number value MR6 used to determine the MR initial value is a random number value used to determine the initial value of the random number value MR5, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 8 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special pattern that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or special symbol state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 will determine that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability that it will determine that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state when the gaming state is a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 9 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine one of several types of jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and that the jackpot game state should be controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) that is compared with the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 is assigned to several types of jackpot types, such as "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," and "Jackpot C," depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 9 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for up to 100 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. Furthermore, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are also jackpots for which probability variable control is executed for up to 100 variable displays after the jackpot game ends when the game ball enters the second large prize slot (so-called V entry) in the sixth round of the jackpot game state.

The jackpot gaming state resulting from "Jackpot A" is a jackpot gaming state in which six rounds are repeated in which the first major prize slot is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in rounds 1 through 6 (a jackpot with six rounds and no V prize). The jackpot gaming state resulting from "Jackpot B" is a jackpot gaming state in which the first major prize slot is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in rounds 1 through 5, while the second major prize slot is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in round 6 (a jackpot with six lands and a V prize). The jackpot gaming state resulting from "Jackpot C" is a jackpot gaming state in which the first major prize slot is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in rounds 1 through 5 and rounds 7 through 10, while the second major prize slot is changed to an open state advantageous to the player in round 6 (a jackpot with ten lands and a V prize).

In this embodiment, at least the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. If a jackpot occurs while the time-saving control is being executed, the time-saving control (and the probability variable control) will be executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot gaming state, in which jackpot gaming states occur consecutively without an intermediate normal state.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, are provided as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or fewer types of jackpots, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 9 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," and "Jackpot C" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In other words, when the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "0" to "49") is assigned to the jackpot types "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B," which have fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B." This setting allows the proportion of jackpots determined as "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot B," which have fewer rounds, to be different between when determining the jackpot type as one of several types in a special game using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A and when determining the jackpot type as one of several types in a special game using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never determined to be "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot B," which results in a jackpot state with fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start-up winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high-opening control accompanying time-saving control, frequent jackpot states with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

Figures 10 and 11 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of fluctuation patterns in this embodiment. The fluctuation patterns in this embodiment are broadly divided into loss fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a loss and jackpot fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 10, the miss fluctuation patterns can be broadly divided into non-reach miss fluctuation patterns where no reach effects are executed and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: non-reach), normal reach fluctuation patterns where a normal reach reach effect is executed and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: normal reach), low base weak super reach fluctuation patterns where a low base weak super reach A reach effect or a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed in a normal state (low base state) and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: low base weak super reach), and normal state (low base The fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach A in the normal state (low base state) where the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is finally executed and results in a miss (fluctuation pattern type: low base strong super reach A fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach B in the normal state (low base state) where the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is finally executed and results in a miss (fluctuation pattern type: low base strong super reach B fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach C in the normal state (low base state) where the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is finally executed and results in a miss (fluctuation pattern type: low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern). Fluctuation pattern of strong base super reach C), fluctuation pattern of low base strongest super reach in normal state (low base state) where the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is finally executed and results in a miss (fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern), fluctuation pattern of high base super reach A in time-saving state or probability variable state (high base state) where the reach effect of high base super reach A is finally executed and results in a miss (fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A fluctuation pattern), fluctuation pattern of high base super reach B in time-saving state or probability variable state (high base state) where the reach effect of high base super reach B is finally executed There are various fluctuation patterns available: a high base Super Reach B fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach B fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach C is ultimately executed in a time-saving state or a probability variable state (high base state) and results in a miss; a high base Super Reach C fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach C fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach D is ultimately executed in a time-saving state or a probability variable state (high base state) and results in a miss; and a high base Super Reach D fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach D fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach D is ultimately executed in a time-saving state or a probability variable state (high base state).

Four types of non-reach fluctuation patterns are available: PA1-1, where the special chart fluctuation time is 12,000 ms and no reach effects are executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is two or less in normal state; PA1-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 5,000 ms and no reach effects are executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is three in normal state; PA1-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 2,000 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state or special probability state); and PA1-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 8,000 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state or special probability state).

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for normal reach fluctuation patterns: PA2-1A, where the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms and a normal reach reach effect is executed, resulting in a miss; PA2-1B, where the special chart fluctuation time is 35,000 ms and a pseudo consecutive effect is executed once, followed by a normal reach reach effect, resulting in a miss; and PA2-1C, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms and a pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice, followed by a normal reach reach effect, resulting in a miss.

There are two types of fluctuation patterns for the low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern type: PA2-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 73,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance and a low base weak super reach A reach performance are executed, resulting in a miss; and PA2-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 83,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance and a low base weak super reach B reach performance are executed, resulting in a miss.

The fluctuation pattern type for low base strong super reach A is 103,000 ms, which is the special chart fluctuation time of 93,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms. PA2-4 is a pattern in which two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach A reach effect are executed, followed by a low base strong super reach A reach effect, resulting in a miss. The special chart fluctuation time is 113,000 ms, which is the special chart fluctuation time of 103,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PA2-5, in which two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach B reach effect are executed, followed by a low base strong super reach A reach effect, resulting in a loss; and PA2-6, in which the special chart variation time is 40,000 ms plus the loss notification period of 10,000 ms, totaling 50,000 ms, in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong super reach A reach effect, resulting in a loss.

The fluctuation pattern type for low base strong super reach B is 118,000 ms, which is the special chart fluctuation time of 108,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms. After two pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach reach performance, and a low base weak super reach A reach performance are executed, a low base strong super reach B reach performance is executed and a miss occurs in PA2-7. The special chart fluctuation time is 123,000 ms, which is the special chart fluctuation time of 113,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PA2-8, in which two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach B reach effect are executed, followed by a low base strong super reach B reach effect, resulting in a loss; and PA2-9, in which the special chart variation time is 45,000 ms plus the loss notification period of 10,000 ms, totaling 55,000 ms, in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong super reach B reach effect, resulting in a loss.

The fluctuation pattern type for low base strong super reach C is 128,000 ms, which is the special chart fluctuation time of 118,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms. PA2-10 is a miss pattern where two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach A effect are executed, followed by a low base strong super reach C effect. The special chart fluctuation time is 133,000 ms, which is the special chart fluctuation time of 123,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PA2-11, in which two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach B reach effect are executed, followed by a low base strong super reach C reach effect, resulting in a loss; and PA2-12, in which the special chart variation time is 50,000 ms plus the loss notification period of 10,000 ms, totaling 60,000 ms, in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong super reach C reach effect, resulting in a loss.

The fluctuation pattern type for the low base strongest super reach is 138,000 ms, which is the special chart fluctuation time of 128,000 ms plus the 10,000 ms miss notification period. PA2-13 is a miss pattern where two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach A reach effect are executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach effect. The special chart fluctuation time is 143,000 ms, which is the 133,000 ms plus the 10,000 ms miss notification period. There are three types of variation patterns: PA2-14, in which two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach B reach effect are executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach effect, resulting in a loss; and PA2-15, in which the special chart variation time is 60,000 ms plus the loss notification period of 10,000 ms, totaling 70,000 ms, in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach effect, resulting in a loss.

For the high base super reach A variation pattern type, there is one variation pattern, PA2-16, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, for a total of 40,000 ms, and after the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, the reach performance of a high base super reach A is executed, resulting in a miss.For the high base super reach B variation pattern type, there is one variation pattern, PA2-17, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the miss notification period of 10,000 ms, for a total of 40,000 ms, and after the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, the reach performance of a high base super reach B is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base super reach C variation pattern type, there is one variation pattern, PA2-18, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the 10,000 ms miss notification period, for a total of 40,000 ms, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed followed by the reach performance of a high base super reach C, resulting in a miss.For the high base super reach D variation pattern type, there is one variation pattern, PA2-19, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the 10,000 ms miss notification period, for a total of 40,000 ms, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed followed by the reach performance of a high base super reach D, resulting in a miss.

Also, as shown in Figure 11, the jackpot fluctuation patterns are similar to the miss fluctuation patterns in that they include the following fluctuation patterns: low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 11, the fluctuation pattern type for low base strong super reach A is PB1-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, resulting in 108,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a base weak super reach A reach effect are executed, a low base strong super reach A reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, resulting in 108 ... There are three types of variation patterns: PB1-3, which lasts 18,000 ms and involves two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach B reach effect, followed by a low base strong super reach A reach effect, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-4, which has a special chart variation time of 55,000 ms, consisting of 40,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and involves a normal reach effect followed by a low base strong super reach A reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

The fluctuation pattern for the low base strong super reach B fluctuation pattern is 123,000 ms, which is the sum of 108,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms. PB1-5 involves two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach A effect, followed by a low base strong super reach B effect, resulting in a jackpot. The special chart fluctuation time is 128,000 ms, which is the sum of 113,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PB1-6, in which two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach B reach effect are executed, followed by a low base strong super reach B reach effect, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-7, in which the special chart variation time is 45,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, resulting in a 60,000 ms, in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong super reach B reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

The fluctuation pattern for the low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern is 133,000 ms, which is the sum of the special chart fluctuation time of 118,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms. After two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach A reach effect are executed, a low base strong super reach C reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. PB1-8: The special chart fluctuation time is 138,000 ms, which is the sum of the special chart fluctuation time of 123,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PB1-9, which has two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach B reach effect, followed by a low base strong super reach C reach effect, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-10, which has a special chart variation time of 65,000 ms, which is the sum of 50,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and has a normal reach reach effect followed by a low base strong super reach C reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

The fluctuation pattern type for the low base strongest super reach is PB1-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 128,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, for a total of 143,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach A reach effect are executed, a low base strongest super reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. The special chart fluctuation time is 133,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, for a total of 148,000 ms. There are three types of variation patterns: PB1-12, which has two pseudo consecutive effects, a normal reach effect, and a low base weak super reach B reach effect, followed by a low base strongest super reach effect, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-13, which has a special chart variation time of 75,000 ms, which is the sum of 60,000 ms and the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, and has a normal reach effect followed by a low base strongest super reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

For the high base Super Reach A variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-14, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, for a total of 45,000 ms, in which the high base Super Reach A reach effect is executed after the normal reach reach effect, resulting in a jackpot. For the high base Super Reach B variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-15, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, for a total of 45,000 ms, in which the high base Super Reach B reach effect is executed after the normal reach reach effect, resulting in a jackpot. The variation pattern type for high base super reach C is PB1-16, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, for a total of 45,000 ms, in which a high base super reach C reach effect is executed after a normal reach reach effect, resulting in a jackpot. The variation pattern type for high base super reach D is PB1-17, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms plus the jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms, for a total of 45,000 ms, in which a high base super reach D reach effect is executed after a normal reach reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

The determination tables stored in ROM 101 include multiple variation pattern type determination tables for determining the variation pattern type according to the game status and variable display results, and multiple variation pattern type determination tables for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern type determination table, the game status, the variable display results, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute the variable display (number of reserved memories subject to variable display).

In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the game status and variable display results. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the read random number value MR3 to determine the variation pattern type.

For example, if the game status is normal and the variable display result is a miss, the miss variation pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 12 (A) is selected, and the value of the miss variation pattern type determination table A is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the variation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base weak super reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in Figure 12 (B) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern type determination table B is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

Also, if the game status is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 12 (C) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A with the value of random number value MR3. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 20766 to 3380, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach."

Also, if the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in Figure 12 (D) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table B with the value of random number value MR3. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 975, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D."

After determining the type of variation pattern as described above, one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 13 to 15 is selected based on the game status, the variable display result, and the number of reserved special symbols that will execute the variable display (number of reserved symbols for variable display), and the selected variation pattern determination table is compared with the read random number value MR4 to determine the variation pattern.

For example, if the variable display result is a loss, the game status is normal, and the number of variable display target reserved memories is 0 to 2, the loss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 13 (A) is selected, and the loss variation pattern determination table A is compared with the value of the random number value MR4 to determine the variation pattern. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1A if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 140, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1B if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 141 to 220, and the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1C if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 221 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is a low base weak super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 199, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-2, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 200 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-3.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

Also, if the variable display result is a loss, the game status is normal, and the number of variable display target reserved memories is three, the loss variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 13 (B) is selected, and the loss variation pattern determination table B is compared with the value of the random number value MR4 to determine the variation pattern. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-2 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1A if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 140, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1B if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 141 to 220, and the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1C if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 221 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 14 is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the value of the random number value MR4 with the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-3 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 200, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-4 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 201 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-1A if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-18 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-19 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game status is normal, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 15 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-2, if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-3, and if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-4. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-5; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-6; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-7.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-8; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-9; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-10. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-11; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-12; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-13.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 15 (B) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-14 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-15 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-16 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-17 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

By determining the variation pattern type and variation pattern as described above, in this embodiment, when the game state is normal (low base state), the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (expected jackpot) is set to be highest when the reach effect of the low base strongest super reach is ultimately executed, and when the reach effect of the low base strong super reach C is ultimately executed, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set to be lower than when the reach effect of the low base strongest super reach is ultimately executed.

If the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is finally executed, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set lower than when the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is finally executed, and if the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is finally executed, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set lower than when the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is finally executed (expected jackpot probability in low base state: low base strongest super reach > low base strong super reach C > low base strong super reach B > low base strong super reach A).

In addition, when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability variable state (high base state), the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set to be highest when the high base super reach D reach effect is ultimately executed, and the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set to be lower when the high base super reach C reach effect is ultimately executed than when the high base super reach D reach effect is ultimately executed.

When the reach effect of high base Super Reach B is finally executed, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set lower than when the reach effect of high base Super Reach C is finally executed, and when the reach effect of high base Super Reach A is finally executed, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is set lower than when the reach effect of high base Super Reach B is finally executed (expected jackpot probability in high base state: high base Super Reach D > high base Super Reach C > high base Super Reach B > high base Super Reach A).

In this embodiment, an example is given in which there are no cases where a normal reach reach effect is executed to result in a jackpot or a non-reach jackpot when the gaming state is in both a low base state and a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases where a normal reach reach effect is executed to result in a jackpot or a non-reach jackpot. Furthermore, there may be cases where a normal reach reach effect is executed to result in a jackpot or a non-reach jackpot when the gaming state is in both a low base state and a high base state, or only one of them.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. Data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 has a game control data holding area 003SG150, as shown in FIG. 16, which is an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 003SG150 shown in FIG. 16 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 003SG152, a game control timer setting unit 003SG153, a game control counter setting unit 003SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 003SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151A stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that have not yet started but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning).

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151B stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, resulting in a start winning (second start winning), but which have not yet started.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 003SG151A associates the reserve number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the first start entry port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 003SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 003SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 003SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, the variable display based on the second hold memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 003SG151C associates game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball as reserve data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 003SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 003SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 003SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 003SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 003SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 003SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 003SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 003SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR5, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 003SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 003SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 003SG190 as shown in Figure 17(A). The performance control data storage area 003SG190 shown in Figure 17(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 003SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 003SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 003SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 003SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 003SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 003SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 003SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 003SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 003SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 003SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 003SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 003SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 003SG194A shown in FIG. 17(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 003SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 003SG194A has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer 003SG194A also has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of four commands is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command), a designation command, and a variable category command. The storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 003SG194A have storage areas (entries) reserved for associating the start win designation command, reserved memory count notification command, designation command, and variable category command and storing them separately as the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the special drawing hit waiting process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A has a memory area reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a hold display flag, to which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold memory display is set, a hold display final mode flag, to which a flag value corresponding to the final display pattern of the hold memory display is set, and a hold display change timing flag, to which a flag value corresponding to the timing at which the display pattern of the hold memory display changes to the final display pattern, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart hold memory and the second special chart hold memory.

If the hold display effect setting process described below does not decide to execute a hold display effect, the hold display final mode flag is set to "0," which corresponds to the normal hold display display pattern. If the hold display effect setting process is decided to execute a hold display effect, the flag is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), which corresponds to a hold memory display pattern that is a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or star (☆)). After the hold display effect determination process is executed, the hold display update process described below is executed, so that the active display and hold display are displayed in a mode corresponding to each hold display flag (for example, a hollow circle (○) if the hold display flag value is "0," a square (◇) if the hold display flag value is "1," and a star (☆) if the hold display flag value is "2").

In addition, the hold display flag is set to "0," which corresponds to the normal hold display pattern, and when it is decided to execute the hold display effect, the value of the hold display final mode flag is set according to the timing that corresponds to the value of the hold display change timing flag.

In this embodiment, the value of the hold display change timing flag indicates the timing at which each hold memory shifts as hold memory for each buffer number, and the performance control CPU 120 executes a process to set the value of the hold display final mode flag as the value of the hold display flag at the timing at which each hold memory shifts as hold memory for the buffer number corresponding to the value of the hold display change timing flag.

When a start win occurs in the first start win slot, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 003SG194A. When a start win occurs in the second start win slot, the CPU 120 stores commands starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 003SG194A. When a start win occurs, the start win slot designation command, reserved symbol number notification command, symbol designation command, and variable symbol category command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win slot designation command, reserved symbol number notification command, symbol designation command, and variable symbol category command are stored in sequence in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" through "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 003SG194A shown in Figure 17(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (the entry with buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols in the first special symbol reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in Figure 17(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "0" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3." Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is currently being variably displayed.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 18, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

Also, if the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process of Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the working area by executing the clearing process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and then enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 19. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 19 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, first count switch 23, and second count switch 24, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, a predetermined information output process is executed, and data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start wins that have occurred), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached) is output to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 19. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the results of the determination, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command thus transmitted and set for the start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 19.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the device to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 82 and 83 for the large prize opening door. At this time, depending on the type of jackpot, for example, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set, the large prize opening to be opened, and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by count switches 23 and 24. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5", whereas if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes waiting for the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, is executed, and making various settings to start special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0" and the jackpot end process ends.

(Starting winning judgment process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A (003SGS101). If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (003SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (003SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 003SG154. When the number of reserved memories of the first special chart in 003SGS102 is not the upper limit value (003SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 003SG155 is set to "0" (003SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 003SGS101 is off (003SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 003SGS102 has reached the upper limit (003SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (003SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (003SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (003SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 003SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 003SGS105 is not the upper limit (003SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 003SG155 is set to "2" (003SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 003SGS103 or 003SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (003SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (003SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 003SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 003SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 003SG154 (003SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the extracted random numbers and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserve memory unit (003SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot," and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 003SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 003SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (003SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby making a setting for sending a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby making a setting for sending a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 19.

Following the processing of 003SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step 003SGS112), and then performs settings to send a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (003SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in Figure 19 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 003SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (003SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 003SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (003SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 003SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (003SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

(Random number determination process when winning)
FIG. 22(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 003SGS112 of FIG. 21 as the random number value determination process at the time of winning. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol is initiated, the normal special symbol process described below determines whether the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) is set to a "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to a jackpot. In addition, the variable pattern setting process described below determines a variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Separately from these determinations, when the gaming ball is detected in the start winning slot (first start winning slot or second start winning slot), the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at step 003SGS112 to determine whether the special symbol display result is determined to be a static display of a jackpot symbol, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode associated with a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of a game ball entering the starting winning hole begins, that is, before it is decided whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the decorative symbol will be, and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120, etc., will execute preview performances such as pre-reading preview performances, as will be described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 22 (A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the probability variable flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 003SG152 (step 003SGS121). When the probability variable flag is on, the CPU 103 identifies the probability variable state (high probability, high base state); when the probability variable flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, the CPU 103 identifies the time-saving state (low probability, high base state); and when both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are off, the CPU 103 identifies the normal state (low probability, low base state).

Following the processing of step 003SGS121, the display result judgment table shown in Figure 8 is selected and set (step 003SGS122). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result extracted in step 003SGS109 of Figure 17 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 003SGS123). The jackpot judgment range is set with individual judgment values assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" in the special symbol display result judgment table selected by the processing of step 003SGS122, and the CPU 103 can determine whether or not there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range can be set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including that random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot."

If step 003SGS123 determines that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it determines that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 003SGS123; N), the transmission setting for the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss," is executed (step 003SGS128), and a miss variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the game state is selected (step 003SGS130). For example, if the game state is the normal state, miss variation pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 12 (A) can be selected, and if the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variable state, miss variation pattern type determination table B shown in Figure 12 (B) can be selected.

Furthermore, if step 003SGS123 determines that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it determines that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 003SGS123; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 used for jackpot type determination, as shown in FIG. 9(A) (step 003SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects jackpot type determination table data from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table in accordance with the variable special symbol specified in response to the start port buffer value (either the "first special symbol" corresponding to "1" or the "second special symbol" corresponding to "2"). Then, by referencing the selected jackpot type determination table data, it determines which of multiple types the jackpot type will be.

In addition, the system executes settings to send a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type: that is, a second symbol designation command if it is a jackpot A, a third symbol designation command if it is a jackpot B, and a fourth symbol designation command if it is a jackpot C (step 003SGS133), and selects and sets a jackpot variation pattern determination table according to the game state as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 003SGS135). Note that in the processing of step 003SGS135, if the game state is normal (low probability, low base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the game state is time-saving state or probability variable state (low probability, high base state or high probability, high base state), jackpot variation pattern determination table B is set.

After executing steps 003SGS130 and 003SGS135, the CPU 103 uses each fluctuation pattern type determination table set in each step and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern type determination to determine the fluctuation category according to the range of determination values that includes the random number value MR3 (step 003SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22(B), when at least the variable display result is "miss", there are provided variable categories that commonly have a variable display mode of "non-reach" regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category that has a variable display mode of "super reach", and an "other" variable category that has a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and it is sufficient to be able to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, settings are made to send a variable category designation command to the performance control board 12 according to the determination result of the processing in step 003SGS138 (step 003SGS139), and the winning random number determination process is terminated.

(Normal processing of special patterns)
Figure 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 20 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 003SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 003SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

When the number of second special symbol reserved memories is other than "0" in step 003SGS141 (step 003SGS141; N), the following reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to reserved number "0" are read out (step 003SGS142): random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 003SGS142, the second special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry (step 003SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 003SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 003SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" in step 003SGS141 (step 003SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" (step 003SGS145). The number of reserved first special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 003SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol count counter and determines whether the read value is "0." In this way, the processing of step 003SGS145 is executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is determined to be "0" in step 003SGS141, and determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0." As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started before the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol; for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first or second start winning port and a start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winnings occurred, and it may be possible to determine from the stored data whether to start the special symbol game using the first or second special symbol.

When the number of reserved first special symbols stored in step 003SGS145 is other than "0" (step 003SGS145; N), the following numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out as reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory unit corresponding to reserve number "0" (step 003SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the processing of step 003SGS146, the first special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry (step 003SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 003SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 003SGS149.

In step 003SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 8 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "miss." Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss," to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 003SGS150). Furthermore, in this step 003SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, a "jackpot" is determined if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10,000 to 12,180, which corresponds to the high probability state (high probability state), and a "miss" is determined if it does not fall within that range. Additionally, if the probability variable flag is off and the state is low (in this embodiment, this is the low probability low base state and low probability high base state), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 0 to 218, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within this range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 003SGS149, different determination values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. Therefore, in the processing of step 003SGS150, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different determination data (determination values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of a special chart game or the like begins is a high probability state. When the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is determined (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

If step 003SGS150 determines that a jackpot has occurred (step 003SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 003SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(A) is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of several types of jackpots (step 003SGS153). By referencing the jackpot type determination table set in this way, it is determined which of several types of jackpots the jackpot type will be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table: "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," or "Jackpot C" (step 003SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in step 003SGS154, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is determined to be either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state, before the determined special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the value stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 003SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, it can be set to "0," if it is jackpot B, it can be set to "2," and if it is jackpot C, it can be set to "3." After processing step 003SGS155, the process proceeds to step 003SGS156.

Also, if step 003SGS150 determines that the result is a "miss" (step 003SGS150; N), step 003SGS156 is executed without executing steps 003SGS152 to 003SGS155.

In step 003SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the ON state) and the determined result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 003SGS150, if the jackpot type in step 003SGS154 is "jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "2" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "jackpot C," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Note that these fixed special symbols are just examples, and other fixed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as fixed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 003SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 003SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 003SGS145 (step 003SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 003SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Variation pattern setting process)
24 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 20 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 24, the CPU 103 selects a fluctuation pattern type determination table according to the state (step 003SGS160a). For example, when the variable display result is a loss, if the game state is normal, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 12(A) is selected, while if the game state is time-saving or high probability state, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 12(B) is selected. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is normal, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 12(C) is selected, while if the game state is time-saving or high probability state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 12(D) is selected.

Then, based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, stored in a fluctuation random number buffer, for example, the selected (set) fluctuation pattern type determination table is referenced to determine one of several fluctuation pattern types (step 003SGS160b).

The CPU 103 then selects a variation pattern determination table according to the state (step 003SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a miss, if the game state is normal and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 0 to 2, it selects the variation pattern determination table for misses shown in FIG. 13(A). If the game state is normal and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 3, it selects the variation pattern determination table for misses shown in FIG. 13(B). If the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, it selects the variation pattern determination table for misses shown in FIG. 14. Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is normal, it selects the variation pattern determination table for jackpots shown in FIG. 15(A). If the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, it selects the variation pattern determination table for jackpots shown in FIG. 15(B).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which is stored in a fluctuation random number buffer, for example, and the determined fluctuation pattern type, the selected (set) fluctuation pattern determination table is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern as one of several types (step 003SGS162).

After the variation pattern is determined in step 003SGS162, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, depending on the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 003SGS163). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 003SGS163, settings are made to send various commands to be used when the special symbol fluctuation begins (step 003SGS164). For example, when the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is "1," the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in ROM 101 of a pre-prepared first fluctuation start command table in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 003SG155, in order to sequentially send a game status designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a first pending memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of a pre-prepared second variation start command table in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 003SG155, in order to sequentially send a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a second pending memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 003SGS164, the special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the variation pattern, is set (step 003SGS165). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is displayed stationary. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which corresponds to the special symbol variation processing (step 003SGS166), and the variation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission settings in step 003SGS166, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 19 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game status designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a first pending memory number notification command or a second pending memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily; for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the game status designation command, the first pending memory number notification command or the second pending memory number notification command.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. 20 . In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referenced in the special symbol change process of step S113, terminating the special symbol change, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to display the stopped symbols (step 003SGS180). If the special symbol change buffer value is "1," indicating the first special symbol, the first special symbol change is terminated. If the special symbol change buffer value is "2," indicating the second special symbol, the second special symbol change is terminated (step 003SGS181). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 003SGS182). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 003SGS182).

If the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 003SGS182; Y), and if the probability variable flag or time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 003SGS184), and configures the performance control board 12 to send a jackpot start 1 designation command (jackpot A), a jackpot start 2 designation command (jackpot B), or a jackpot start 3 designation command (jackpot C) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 003SGS185).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 003SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 003SGS187). The number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 6 times for jackpot A or jackpot B, or 10 times for jackpot C) is set (step 003SGS188). The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4," which corresponds to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 003SGS189).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 003SGS182; N), step 003SGS191 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (step 003SGS191). If the time-saving flag is off (step 003SGS191; N), proceed to step 003SGS196. If the time-saving flag is on (step 003SGS191; Y), determine whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0." If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 003SGS192; Y), proceed to step 003SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not "0" (step 003SGS192; N), that is, if the game is in a high base state with remaining time-saving counts, the value of the time-saving count counter is decremented by 1 (step 003SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving count counter after decrement is "0" (step 003SGS194). If it is not "0" (step 003SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS196. If the value of the time-saving count counter is "0" (step 003SGS194; Y), the time-saving flag is cleared to the OFF state to terminate the time-saving control (step 003SGS195). At this time, the CPU 103 also determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step 003SGS195a). If the probability variable flag is off (step 003SGS195a; N), proceed to step 003SGS196; if the probability variable flag is on (step 003SGS195a; Y), clear the probability variable flag to the off state (step 003SGS195b) and proceed to step 003SGS196.

In step 003SGS196, the transmission of a game state specification command is set according to the state of the probability variation flag and time-saving flag. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "0," which corresponds to the normal processing of special symbols, and the special symbol stop processing is then terminated (step 003SGS197).

(Processing during jackpot opening)
26 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S115 of FIG. 20 as the jackpot opening processing. In the jackpot opening processing shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the opening time timer by 1 (step 003SGS201), and determines whether the opening time timer has timed out (step 003SGS202). If the opening time timer has not timed out (step 003SGS202; N), it further determines whether it is time to open the large prize opening (step 003SGS203). Whether it is time to open the large prize opening can be determined, for example, by the value of the opening time timer.

If it is not the timing to open the large prize opening (step 003SGS203; N), proceed to step 003SGS206. If it is the timing to open the large prize opening (step 003SGS203; Y), the large prize opening to be opened is controlled to an open state (step 003SGS204), and the transmission of a command specifying whether the large prize opening is open according to the round is set, and proceed to step 003SGS206 (step 003SGS205).

In processing step 003SGS206, the CPU 103 determines whether the first count switch 23 is on (step 003SGS206). If the first count switch 23 is not on (step 003SGS206; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS209. If the first count switch 23 is on (step 003SGS206; Y), the CPU 103 increments the value of the prize number counter by 1 (step 003SGS207) and executes prize ball payout processing to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls (step 003SGS208). Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a command specifying a prize for the large prize slot (step 003SGS208a), and proceeds to step 003SGS209.

In processing step 003SGS209, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 24 is on (step 003SGS209). If the second count switch 24 is not on (step 003SGS209; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS215. If the second count switch 24 is on (step 003SGS209; Y), the CPU 103 increments the value of the winning ball counter by 1 (step 003SGS210), executes the prize ball payout process, which is the same process as step 003SGS208 (step 003SGS211), and sets up the transmission of a command specifying winning from the large prize slot (step 003SGS211a).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag, which indicates that a game ball has already been detected by the second count switch 24 (the second count switch 24 has been turned on), is in the ON state (step 003SGS212). If the V winning flag is not in the ON state (step 003SGS212; Y), the process proceeds to step 003SGS215. If the V winning flag is in the ON state (step 003SGS212; N), the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag to the ON state (step 003SGS213), sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command, and proceeds to step 003SGS215 (step 003SGS214).

In processing step 003SGS215, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the prize count counter is equal to or greater than the large prize opening closure threshold, i.e., whether the value of the prize count counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., 10) for closing the large prize opening (step 003SGS215). If the value of the prize count counter is less than the large prize opening closure threshold (step 003SGS215; N), the jackpot opening processing is terminated. If the value of the prize count counter is equal to or greater than the large prize opening closure threshold (step 003SGS215; Y), the large prize opening to be opened is controlled to a closed state (step 003SGS216). Then, the sending of a command designated after the opening of the jackpot opening is set according to the round (step 003SGS217), the value of the opening count counter is decremented by 1 (step 003SGS218), the value of the special chart process flag is updated to a value according to the post-jackpot opening processing, and the jackpot opening processing is terminated (step 003SGS219).

The commands set for transmission during the jackpot release process are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 19.

Also, although not specifically shown, in post-jackpot release processing, if the completed round of play is the last round of play in the jackpot play state (if the value of the release count counter is 0), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release end processing; if the completed round of play is not the last round of play in the jackpot play state (if the value of the release count counter is 1 or greater), the CPU 103 sets a round start wait timer and updates the value of the special chart process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-jackpot release processing.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S117 of FIG. 20 as the jackpot end processing.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is running, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 003SGS221). If the jackpot end display timer is not running (step 003SGS221; N), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 003SGS222), and ends the processing.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 003SGS221; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 003SGS223). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 003SGS224). If it has not elapsed, processing ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 003SGS224; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag is on (step 003SGS225).

If the V prize flag is on (step 003SGS225; Y), the probability variable flag and time-saving flag are turned on (steps 003SGS227, 003SGS228). The V prize flag is cleared and processing proceeds to step 003SGS232 (step 003SGS229). On the other hand, if the V prize flag is off (step 003SGS225; N), the time-saving flag is turned on and processing proceeds to step 003SGS232 (step 003SGS231).

Then, in step 003SGS232, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving counter to "100." The CPU 103 also turns the jackpot flag off (step 003SGS233) and sets the transmission of a jackpot end command according to the type of jackpot (step 003SGS234). Then, after setting the transmission of a game status designation command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game status based on the ON probability variable flag and time-saving flag (step 003SGS235), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0," which corresponds to the normal special symbol processing, and ends the jackpot end processing (step 003SGS236).

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 28. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 28 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) is executed to execute a demo effect (display of a demo movie) on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to processing in step S73.

In addition, the background display update process in this embodiment can execute control to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the execution of specific effects or changes in the game state during variable display.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed as the effect control process in step S76 of Fig. 28. In the effect control process shown in Fig. 29, the effect control CPU 120 first executes each of the following processes: a hold display effect setting process (step S160), a hold display update process (step S161), a first right-hit display effect process (step S162), a second right-hit display effect process (step S163), a first left-hit display effect process (step S164), and a second left-hit display effect process (step S165).

The hold display effect setting process executes a process to determine whether to execute a hold display effect in which the display mode of the hold display based on a new start winning is changed to a square, star, or other shape that indicates a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state. For example, if the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a hold display effect in the hold display effect setting process, it determines the final mode of the hold display based on a new instruction winning and the timing at which the hold display will change to the final mode. Then, depending on these decisions, it sets predetermined values to the hold display flag, hold display final mode flag, and hold display change timing flag of the hold memory based on a new start winning in the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A.

In the pending display update process, for example, at the start of the variable display of a new special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 references the contents (contents of the pending memory) stored in the start winning command buffer 003SG194A and executes a process to start displaying a new pending display. Furthermore, in the pending display update process, the pending display change timing flag value stored in association with each pending memory is used to determine whether it is the timing for a change in the display mode of each pending display. For pending displays that are the timing for a change in display mode, the pending display final mode flag value stored in association with the pending memory corresponding to the pending display is stored as the pending display flag value. Finally, the effect control CPU 120 simply changes the pending display for each pending memory stored in the start winning command buffer 003SG194A to a mode corresponding to the value of the pending display flag. Note that the pending display update process in this embodiment is a process that starts the display of a new pending display as described above, thereby executing a pending display appearance effect, which will be described later, and a process that changes the display mode of the pending display as described above, thereby executing a pending change effect, which will be described later.

In the first right-hit display presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a process to display a first right-hit display on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, based on the variable display result being a jackpot. In addition, in the second right-hit display presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a process to display a second right-hit display on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, when the game state is a jackpot game state or a high base state. The second right-hit display is smaller in size than the first right-hit display and is displayed in a different display area from the first right-hit display.

In the first left-hit display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes processing to display a first left-hit display instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L based on the game state being controlled from a time-saving state or a probability variable state (high base state) to a normal state (low base state). Furthermore, in the second left-hit display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes processing to display a second left-hit display instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L based on the game ball being shot toward the right game area 2R in the normal state. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 may display the second left-hit display based on receiving a command or the like from CPU 103 indicating that the game ball has passed through gate 41 in the normal state.

After executing steps S160 to S166, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to an instruction (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to an instruction (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops the display of the final decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the stop display of the final decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
30 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 29. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 003SGS301). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 003SGS301; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 003SGS302). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2," and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3."

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is OFF in step 003SGS301 (step 003SGS301; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 003SGS303). If the second variable display start command reception flag is OFF (step 003SGS303; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 003SGS303; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 003SGS304). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2," and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3."

After executing step 003SGS302 or step 003SGS304, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 003SGS305).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) (step 003SGS306). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 003SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot A, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination of three even numbers as the stopping symbols at a higher rate than a decorative pattern combination of three odd numbers other than 7. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot B, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, as the stopping symbols at a higher rate than a decorative pattern combination of three odd numbers other than 7. And when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot C, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, as the stopping symbols, a decorative pattern combination of three odd numbers other than 7. Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a loss, the system determines a combination of three mismatched symbols as the stopping symbols, or a combination that results in a reach loss (loss symbol) such as "767" according to the variation pattern.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number to determine the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After executing step 003SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 performs a variable display start symbol enlargement effect setting process (step 003SGS307) to execute a variable display start symbol enlargement effect that enlarges and displays the decorative symbol when the variable display starts, a line preview effect setting process (step 003SGS308) to execute a first line preview effect and a second line preview effect that indicate the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot by displaying lines during the variable display, and a preview button effect that instructs the player to operate push button 31B immediately before the first line preview effect or the second line preview effect, and a weak super reach title effect setting process (step 003SGS309) to execute a weak super reach title effect that displays the title of the weak super reach effect during the variable display based on the Super Reach variation pattern. Step 003SGS309), strong super reach title effect setting process (step 003SGS310) for executing a strong super reach title effect that displays the title of the strong super reach effect during the variable display based on the Super Reach fluctuation pattern, cut-in effect setting process (step 003SGS311) for executing a cut-in effect that displays a cut-in image indicating the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the strong super reach reach effect, and decide button effect setting process (step 003SGS312) for executing a decide button effect that instructs the player to operate push button 31B immediately before the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot or a miss during the strong super reach reach effect.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern specification command (step 003SGS314) and starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 003SGS315).

In addition, the process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all of which are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 003SGS316). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that decorative patterns are variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern specification command, but the performance control CPU 120 may also select a variation pattern to use from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (step 003SGS317). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 003SGS318). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance processing (step S172) (step 003SGS319).

(Performance processing during jackpot)
31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect processing (step S174) in the effect control process shown in FIG. 29. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first executes an effect according to the jackpot type and round of the jackpot game currently being played (step 003SGS321). The effect control CPU 120 also determines whether the jackpot game currently being played is a jackpot game in a high base state, that is, whether the jackpot game is based on the variable display of the second special symbol (003SGS322). Furthermore, in this embodiment, a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special pattern can only be controlled to a jackpot game state of jackpot A and jackpot B, and a jackpot based on the variable display of the second special pattern can only be controlled to a jackpot game state of jackpot C.Therefore, whether the jackpot game currently being played is a jackpot game in a high base state can be determined by whether the jackpot game currently being played is a jackpot game of jackpot C.

If the jackpot game currently being played is not a jackpot game in a high base state (step 003SGS322; N), the presentation control CPU 120 executes V Challenge presentation processing (step 003SGS323) to execute a V Challenge presentation suggesting that the jackpot game is a jackpot B jackpot game, V Challenge success presentation processing (step 003SGS324) to execute a V Challenge success presentation notifying that the jackpot game is a jackpot B jackpot game, and V Entry notification presentation processing (step 003SGS325) to execute a V Entry notification presentation notifying that the game ball has entered the second large entry slot during the jackpot game, i.e., that a V Entry has occurred.

On the other hand, if the ongoing jackpot game is a jackpot game in a high base state (step 003SGS322; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold sequence suggestion effect process (step 003SGS326) to execute a hold sequence suggestion effect that suggests that there is a hold memory in the hold memory of the second special pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (suggesting that a so-called hold sequence will occur, in which the jackpot game state is controlled without a new start win occurring after the jackpot game ends), and a hold sequence notification effect process (step 003SGS327) to execute a hold sequence notification effect that notifies that there is a hold memory in the hold memory of the second special pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (notifying that a hold sequence will occur).

Furthermore, after executing the processing of steps 003SGS325 and 003SGS327, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a first prize ball notification presentation process (step 003SGS328) to execute a first prize ball number notification presentation that updates the display of the number of prize balls (first prize ball number) won in all jackpot game states from when the jackpot game state is controlled in normal mode until the normal state is controlled again, each time a large prize opening designation command is received, and a second prize ball notification presentation process (step 003SGS329) to execute a second prize ball notification presentation that displays the number of prize balls (second prize ball number) based on the large prize opening designation command, each time a large prize opening designation command is received.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 32 to 34, the effects executed and executable during the variable display differ depending on the variable pattern. For example, the symbol expansion effect at the start of the variable display cannot be executed in a variable display with a non-reach variable pattern, but can be executed in a variable display with a normal reach or super reach variable pattern. Furthermore, while a pseudo-consecutive effect may be executed in a variable display when the gaming state is in a normal state (low base state), a pseudo-consecutive effect may not be executed in a variable display when the gaming state is in a time-saving state or a probability variable state (high base state), and a reach suggestion effect may be executed instead. Furthermore, the symbol alignment effect is an effect that is always executed only when the variable display results in a jackpot, whether the gaming state is in a low base state or a high base state. Although not shown in Figure 33, a reach suggestion effect and a cut-in effect can be executed in PA2-16 to PA2-19, which are variable patterns in the high base state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times a specific effect is executed and the effect pattern differ depending on the variation pattern. For example, among the variation patterns that execute pseudo consecutive effects, the variation pattern PA2-1B executes the pseudo consecutive effect once during variable display, while PA2-1C, PA2-2 to PA2-5, PA2-7 to PA2-8, PA2-9 to PA2-10, PA2-13 to PA2-14, PB1-2 to PB1-3, PB1-5 to PB1-6, PB1-8 to PB1-9, and PB1-11 to PB1-12 execute the pseudo consecutive effect twice.

Furthermore, among the variable patterns that execute the weak super reach effect, PA2-2, PA2-4, PA2-7, PA2-10, PA2-13, PB1-2, PB1-5, PB1-8, and PB1-11 execute the low base weak super reach A reach effect during variable display, while PA2-3, PA2-5, PA2-8, PA2-11, PA2-14, PB1-3, PB1-6, PB1-9, and PB1-12 execute the low base weak super reach B reach effect during variable display.

In addition, among the variable patterns that execute the strong super reach effect, PA2-4 to PA2-6 and PB1-2 to PB1-4 execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A during variable display, PA2-7 to PA2-9 and PB1-5 to PB1-7 execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B during variable display, PA2-10 to PA2-12 and PB1-8 to PB1-10 execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C during variable display, and PA2-13 to PA2-15 and PB1-11 execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C during variable display, -PB1-13 executes the reach effect of low base strong super reach D during variable display, PA2-16 and PB1-14 executes the reach effect of high base super reach A during variable display, PA2-17 and PB1-15 executes the reach effect of high base super reach B during variable display, PA2-18 and PB1-16 executes the reach effect of high base super reach C during variable display, and PA2-19 and PB1-17 executes the reach effect of high base super reach D during variable display.

(Details of the effect display)
The effects shown in Figures 29 to 34 include effects that are displayed on the image display device 5 when executed.

Figures 35 and 36 are explanatory diagrams of effects displayed on an image display device during execution in this embodiment. The decorative symbol enlargement effect at the start of variable display is an effect in which decorative symbols are enlarged at the start of variable display between the low base state and the high base state, and a decorative effect serving as the first effect of the present invention is displayed on the decorative symbols during these enlarged displays. The preview button effect is an effect in which, during variable display between the low base state and the high base state, an operation prompt image is displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B immediately before the first line preview effect, the second line preview effect, and the cut-in effect, and when the operation prompt image is displayed, a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect, is displayed on the operation prompt image. Note that the brightness of the light-emitting effect in the preview button effect is displayed at a lower brightness than the light-emitting effect in the decide button effect, which will be described later.

The first line preview effect is an effect that displays the first line (line A or line B) immediately after the preview button effect ends (immediately after the player operates push button 31B or immediately after the operation acceptance period ends) during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state, and is an effect that displays an enlargement effect on the first line when it is displayed.

The second line preview effect is an effect that displays the second line (line C or line D) immediately after the preview button effect ends (immediately after the player operates push button 31B or immediately after the operation acceptance period ends) during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state, and is an effect that displays a decorative effect as the second effect of the present invention targeting the second line when the second line is displayed.

The pseudo consecutive effect is an effect in which pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C during variable display in a low base state. At the timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols' temporary stop, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily enlarged and then reduced (returning to the size they were immediately before the temporary stop). Furthermore, the pseudo consecutive effect displays an enlargement effect on the pseudo consecutive symbols when they are enlarged or reduced, and displays a decorative effect on the pseudo consecutive symbols immediately before they temporarily stop.

The reach suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the currently executing variable display will reach during a variable display in a high base state. If the currently executing variable display does not reach, i.e., if it is a non-reach miss, when a non-reach miss notification image is displayed indicating that it will be a non-reach miss, a decorative effect serving as the third effect of the present invention is displayed on the non-reach miss notification image.

The normal reach effect is an effect that suggests that the reach effect will develop into a weak super reach effect or a strongest super reach effect during variable display in a low base state, and is an effect that displays an enlarged effect on the decorative symbols that make up the reach when the reach occurs (the decorative symbols that stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R).

The weak super reach title effect is an effect that displays the title of the reach effect of the weak super reach that will be executed subsequently during variable display in the low base state, and when the title of the reach effect of the weak super reach is displayed, an enlarged effect is displayed targeting the title of the reach effect of the weak super reach.

The development effect is an effect that indicates that the reach effect of a weak super reach will progress to that of a strong super reach during variable display in a low base state by temporarily stopping the development symbol in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C.When the development symbol is displayed (temporarily stopped), both an enlargement effect and a decorative effect are displayed on the development symbol.

The Strong Super Reach Title effect is an effect that displays the title of the Strong Super Reach reach effect that will be executed subsequently while the low base state and high base state are being variable displayed.When the title of the Strong Super Reach reach effect is displayed, both an enlargement effect and a decorative effect are displayed on the title of the Strong Super Reach reach effect.

The cut-in effect is a display that suggests the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state by displaying a cut-in image during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state.When the cut-in image is displayed, an enlarged effect is displayed on the cut-in image.

The deciding button effect is an effect that displays an operation prompt image urging the player to operate the push button 31B immediately before displaying the result of the strong super reach reach effect, i.e., the result notification image of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state, during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state. When the operation prompt image is displayed, a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect, is displayed on the operation prompt image. Note that the brightness of the light-emitting effect in the deciding button effect is displayed at a higher brightness than the light-emitting effect in the preview button effect described above.

The symbol alignment effect is an effect that is executed after an image indicating a jackpot is displayed as a result of the strong super reach reach effect during variable display between the low base state and the high base state. It is an effect in which the same decorative symbol is displayed stationary in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and these decorative symbols are temporarily enlarged and then reduced (returning to the size they were immediately before the stationary display). The symbol alignment effect is an effect in which a decorative effect is displayed when the same decorative symbol is displayed stationary (when the symbols are aligned), and an enlargement effect is displayed when these decorative symbols are reduced in size.

The enlarged symbol effect when a symbol stops is an effect that is executed each time a decorative symbol stops (excluding the middle symbol in the variable display that executes a super reach) during the variable display between the low base state and the high base state, and is an effect in which these decorative symbols are temporarily enlarged and then reduced (returning to the size they were in immediately before the symbol stopped). The enlarged symbol effect when a symbol stops is an effect that targets these decorative symbols and displays a decorative effect when the same decorative symbol stops (when the symbols line up), and also displays an enlarged effect when these decorative symbols are reduced in size. The enlarged symbol effect when a symbol stops is an effect that targets these decorative symbols and displays a decorative effect, which serves as the fourth effect of the present invention, when they stop.

The pending display appearance effect is an effect in which, when a new start winning occurs (a new pending memory occurs) in the low base state and the high base state, a pending display based on that start winning is displayed in the special pending memory display area 5U. Furthermore, from the time the pending display based on the new start winning begins to be displayed, a decorative effect, serving as a light-emitting effect in this invention, is displayed on the pending display based on the new start winning.

The hold change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the currently displayed hold display between the low base state and the high base state from a white circle to a white square, star, or other shape that indicates a high probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state. Furthermore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, a decorative effect, serving as a light-emitting effect in this invention, is displayed on the hold display whose display mode is changing.

The first right-hit display effect is an effect in which, during a jackpot game state, the image display device 5 displays a first right-hit display instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. In addition, when the first right-hit display begins to be displayed and while it is being displayed, a decorative effect is displayed targeting the first right-hit display.

The second right-hit display effect is an effect in which, in the high base state and jackpot game state, the image display device 5 displays a second right-hit display instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. Additionally, while the second right-hit display is being displayed, a decorative effect is displayed targeting the second right-hit display.

The first left-hand hit display effect is an effect in which, when the game state is in a low base state, the image display device 5 displays a first left-hand hit display instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area 2L based on the change in the game state from a high base state to the low base state. In addition, while the first left-hand hit display is being displayed, a decorative effect is displayed targeting the first left-hand hit display.

The second left-hand hit display effect is an effect in which, based on detecting that the game ball has been hit toward the right game area 2R in the low base state, the image display device 5 displays a second left-hand hit display instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area 2L. Furthermore, while the second left-hand hit display is being displayed, a decorative effect is displayed targeting the second left-hand hit display. Whether or not the game ball has been hit toward the right game area 2R in the low base state can be determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 in the low base state.

The fanfare effect is an effect in which, during a jackpot game state, a display such as "BONUS" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify players that control will be exercised to open the large prize slot. The fanfare effect also displays an enlarged effect on the display such as "BONUS."

The V Challenge effect is an effect that, during a jackpot game, suggests that the jackpot game in question is a jackpot B jackpot game, that is, an effect that suggests that control to open the second large prize opening will be executed during the jackpot game. The V Challenge effect also displays a message on the image display device 5 encouraging the player to repeatedly press the push button 31B, such as "Press the button repeatedly," and updates the meter displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and displays an enlarged effect targeting the message.

The V Challenge Successful Effect is an effect that, when in a jackpot game state, based on the fact that the jackpot game currently being played is a jackpot B, updates the meter to a full display corresponding to a jackpot B when the push button 31B is pressed a specified number of times during the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B during the V Challenge effect, or when the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B during the V Challenge effect has ended. Furthermore, the V Challenge Successful Effect is an effect that displays an enlargement effect and a decorative effect on the meter when the meter is updated to a full display.

The V Winning Effect is an effect that occurs when, during a jackpot game state, the game ball enters the second large winning slot after the V Challenge Success Effect, i.e., a V Win occurs. This effect displays a "V" on the image display device 5 to indicate that a V Win has occurred, and then temporarily enlarges and then reduces the "V" display (returning it to the size it was in immediately before the enlarged display). The V Winning Effect also targets the "V" display, displays an enlargement effect when the "V" display is reduced, and displays decorative effects when the "V" display begins and is still on.

The pending streak suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that, in the jackpot game state of jackpot C, that is, in a jackpot game state during a jackpot game, there is a pending memory in the second special symbol pending memory whose variable display result will be a jackpot.In other words, even if a new second special symbol pending memory is not generated after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state again based on the variable display of the second special symbol for the first four times, suggesting the occurrence of a so-called pending streak.Furthermore, the pending streak suggestion effect is an effect that displays an operation prompt image on the image display device 5 instructing the player to operate push button 31B, and targets the operation prompt image with a decorative effect as the appearance effect of the present invention when the operation prompt image begins to be displayed, and displays a decorative effect different from that at the start of display while the operation prompt image is being displayed.

The consecutive hold notification effect is an effect in which, during a jackpot C jackpot game state, there is a hold memory in the second special chart hold memory that results in a jackpot as a variable display result, and when push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period for push button 31B during the consecutive hold suggestion effect, or when the operation acceptance period for push button 31B during the consecutive hold suggestion effect has ended, a "V" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the "V" display is temporarily enlarged and then reduced (returning to the size it was before the enlarged display). The consecutive hold notification effect is also an effect in which, for the "V" display, an enlargement effect is displayed when the "V" display is reduced, and a decorative effect is displayed when the "V" display begins and is still being displayed.

Note that the display of the "V" in the consecutive hold notification effect in this embodiment is different from the display of the "V" in the V winning effect (for example, the size, display color, and shape are different), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the "V" may be the same for the consecutive hold notification effect and the V winning effect.

The first prize ball count notification effect is an effect that updates the total prize ball count display (the display of the total number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state from when the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the normal state until when the game is controlled to the low base state) displayed on the image display device 5 for each winning ball that enters the jackpot gaming slot during jackpot gaming. The first prize ball count notification effect is also an effect that displays a decorative effect on the total prize ball count display when the total prize ball count display is updated.

The second prize ball notification effect is an effect in which, when the total prize ball count display (the display of the total number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state from when the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the normal state until when the game is controlled to the low base state) displayed on the image display device 5 for each winning number of gaming balls that enter the jackpot slot during jackpot gaming is updated to a specific format (for example, a display of a value corresponding to the number of prize balls, such as "5000" or "10000"). The second prize ball notification effect is also an effect in which, when the specific prize ball count display is displayed, a decorative effect is displayed on the specific prize ball count display.

The ending effect is a display (such as "BATTLE RUSH ENTERED!!") that corresponds to the controlled game state (high base state) when all control over the opening of the large prize slot in that jackpot game has ended during that jackpot game. The display that corresponds to the controlled game state is then temporarily enlarged and then reduced (returning to the size it was before the enlarged display). The ending effect is also a display that displays an enlargement effect when the display that corresponds to the controlled game state is reduced.

(Hold display effect setting process)
In the pending display effect setting process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A and determines whether there is an entry for which the pending display flag or the pending display final mode flag is not set. If there is an entry for which the pending display flag or the pending display final mode flag is not set, the variable display result is identified from the symbol designation command and variable category command of that entry. Then, based on the identified variable display result, it determines whether to execute the pending display effect and the effect pattern.

In this embodiment, two presentation patterns for the hold display presentation are provided: presentation pattern A and presentation pattern B. If it is decided to execute the hold display presentation using presentation pattern A, the hold memory display is displayed as a white square (◇), and if it is decided to execute the hold display presentation using presentation pattern B, the hold memory display is displayed as a white star (☆). In addition, if it is decided not to execute the hold display presentation, the hold memory display is displayed as a white circle (○).

As shown in Figure 37 (A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 25% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern A, and a 70% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern B. If the variable display result is a miss but not a reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 5% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern A, and a 0% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern B. If the variable display result is a miss but a normal reach, there is a 75% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 20% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern A, and a 5% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using presentation pattern B. If the variable display result is a Super Reach miss, there is a 65% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, a 25% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using effect pattern A, and a 10% chance that the hold display effect will be executed using effect pattern B.

Furthermore, if the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the hold display effect, it sets the hold display flag and hold display final mode flag to "0" for the entry that was the subject of judgment for the hold display effect in the start winning time reception command buffer 003SG194A.

Next, if it has been decided that a pending display effect will be executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing at which the display mode of the pending memory display will change to a display mode corresponding to the pending display final mode flag. As shown in Figure 37 (B), if the buffer number of the entry that is the subject of judgment for the pending display effect is "1-0" or "2-0" and the variable display is not being executed, that is, if the start winning occurs when the variable display is not being executed and the number of pending memories up to that point is 0, the timing at which the display mode of the pending memory display will change is determined to be 100% the same timing as the appearance of the pending memory display (i.e., the timing at which it starts displaying as an active display).

Furthermore, if the buffer number of the entry that is the subject of judgment for the pending display effect is "1-1" or "2-1" and the variable display is in progress, that is, if the timing of the start winning occurs when the variable display is in progress and the number of pending memories up to that point is 0, the timing of the change in the display mode of the pending memory display is determined 50% to be the same timing as the appearance of the pending memory display (i.e., the timing when the first pending memory display starts to be displayed), and 50% to be the timing of the shift to active display.

Furthermore, if the buffer number of the entry that is the subject of judgment for the pending display effect is "1-2" or "2-2," that is, if there is only one pending memory at the time the start winning occurs, the timing of the change in the display mode of the pending memory display is determined to be the same timing as the appearance of the pending memory display (i.e., the timing when the display starts as the second pending memory display) 33% of the time, the timing to shift to the active display 33% of the time, and the timing to shift to the first pending memory display 33% of the time.

Furthermore, if the buffer number of the entry that is the subject of judgment for the pending display effect is "1-3" or "2-3," that is, if the number of pending memories up to that point at the time of the start winning is two, the timing of the change in the display mode of the pending memory display is determined 25% of the time to be the same timing as the appearance of the pending memory display (i.e., the timing when the display starts as the third pending memory display), 25% of the time to be the shift timing for the active display, 25% of the time to be the shift timing for the first pending memory display, and 25% of the time to be the shift timing for the second pending memory display.

If the buffer number of the entry that is the subject of judgment for the pending display effect is "1-4" or "2-4," that is, if the number of pending memories up to that point at the time the start winning occurs is three, the timing of the change in the display mode of the pending memory display is determined 20% of the time to be the same timing as the appearance of the pending memory display (i.e., the timing when the display starts as the fourth pending memory display), 20% of the time to be the shift timing for the active display, 20% of the time to be the shift timing for the first pending memory display, 20% of the time to be the shift timing for the second pending memory display, and 20% of the time to be the shift timing for the third pending memory display.

When the display mode change timing of the pending memory display is determined as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the determined change timing as the pending display change timing flag for the entry that is the subject of the pending display effect judgment. For example, if the display mode change timing of the pending memory display is determined to be the shift timing for the active display, the pending display change timing flag is set to "0." If the display mode change timing of the pending memory display is determined to be the shift timing for the first pending memory display, the pending display change timing flag is set to "1." If the display mode change timing of the pending memory display is determined to be the shift timing for the second pending memory display, the pending display change timing flag is set to "2." If the display mode change timing of the pending memory display is determined to be the shift timing for the third pending memory display, the pending display change timing flag is set to "3." If the display mode change timing of the pending memory display is determined to be the shift timing for the fourth pending memory display, the pending display change timing flag is set to "4."

Then, the performance control CPU 120 refers to the start winning time received command buffer 003SG194A during the pending display update (step S161), and each time the memory contents of each entry are shifted, it determines whether it is time to change the display mode of the pending memory display from the value of the pending display change flag timing of each entry.If it is not time to change the display mode of the pending memory display, it displays the pending memory display in a mode corresponding to the value of the pending display flag.If it is time to change the display mode of the pending memory display, it sets the value of the pending display final mode flag as the value of the pending display flag and then displays the pending memory display in a mode corresponding to the value of the pending display flag.

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs and it is decided to execute a hold display effect based on the start winning, the timing of the change in the display mode of the hold memory display is determined at an approximately constant rate depending on the situation (i.e., the rate at which the hold memory display is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is approximately constant depending on the timing of the change in the hold memory display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a start winning occurs and it is decided to execute a hold display effect based on the start winning, the rate at which the hold memory display is controlled to the jackpot gaming state may differ depending on the timing of the change in the display mode of the hold memory display.

(Decorative pattern enlargement effect setting process at the start of variable display)
In the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect setting process (step 003SGS307), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variable display result and variation pattern of the variable display that starts from the data read out in steps 003SGS305 and 003SGS306, and determines whether or not to execute the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect based on these variable display result and variation pattern. As shown in Figure 38, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect with a probability of 90% and to not execute the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect with a probability of 10%. When the variable display result is a miss and the variation pattern is a super reach (super reach miss), the effect is to execute the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect with a probability of 40% and to not execute the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect with a probability of 60%.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the enlarged decorative symbol effect is executed at the start of variable display, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (expected jackpot) is set higher than when the enlarged decorative symbol effect is not executed at the start of variable display, and when the enlarged decorative symbol effect is executed at the start of variable display, the probability that a normal reach or super reach reach effect will be executed is set higher than when the enlarged decorative symbol effect is not executed at the start of variable display.

Furthermore, if it is decided to execute the enlarged decorative symbol effect at the start of variable display, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for the enlarged decorative symbol effect at the start of variable display, and in the effect processing during variable display, controls the display of images on the image display device 5, the output of sound from speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, based on the selected process table.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the decorative symbol enlargement effect is not executed when the variable display starts during a variable display with a non-miss-at-all variable pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol enlargement effect may also be executed when the variable display starts during a variable display with a non-miss-at-all variable pattern.

(Dialogue preview performance setting process)
In the dialogue preview effect setting process (step 003SGS308), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variable display result and variation pattern of the variable display starting from the data read out in steps 003SGS305 and 003SGS306, and determines whether or not to execute the dialogue preview effect and the dialogue to be displayed based on these variable display results and variation patterns. As shown in Figure 39 (A), when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 10% chance that the dialogue preview effect will not be executed, a 60% chance that the first dialogue preview effect will be executed, and a 30% chance that the second dialogue preview effect will be executed. When the variable display result is a miss, there is a 45% chance that the dialogue preview effect will not be executed, a 20% chance that the first dialogue preview effect will be executed, and a 35% chance that the second dialogue preview effect will be executed.

Also, as shown in Figure 39 (B), when it is decided to execute the first line preview performance, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or non-reach, the performance control CPU 120 decides to display line A with a probability of 90% and line B with a probability of 10%; and if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, it decides to display line A with a probability of 20% and line B with a probability of 80%.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 39 (C), when it is decided to execute the second line preview effect, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or non-reach, the effect control CPU 120 decides to display line C with an 80% probability and line D with a 20% probability, and if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, it decides to display line C with a 30% probability and line D with a 70% probability.

In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation rate) is set higher when the first line preview effect is executed than when the second line effect is executed. Also, since there is no normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern as a fluctuation pattern in this embodiment, when the first line preview effect is executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation rate) is set higher when line B is displayed than when line A is displayed, and when the second line preview effect is executed, the allocation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation rate) is set higher when line D is displayed than when line C is displayed.

Furthermore, when it is decided to execute a dialogue preview effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for the dialogue preview effect corresponding to the dialogue to be displayed, and in the variable display effect processing, controls the display of images on the image display device 5, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, based on the selected process table.

(Weak Super Reach title effect setting process)
When variable display of the variable patterns of the super reach (PA2-2 to PA2-5, PA2-7, PA2-8, PA2-10, PA2-11, PA2-13, PA2-14, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-5, PB1-6, PB1-8, PB1-9, PB1-11, PB1-12) is started in a low base state, the CPU 120 for effect control identifies the variable display result of the variable display that starts from the data read out in step 003SGS306 in the weak super reach title effect setting process (step 003SGS309), and determines the effect pattern of the weak super reach title effect (the display color of the title displayed at the start of the reach effect of the weak super reach) based on these variable display results.

As shown in Figure 40 (A), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines with a 50% probability that the title displayed at the start of the Weak Super Reach reach effect will be displayed in white, and with a 50% probability that the title displayed at the start of the Weak Super Reach reach effect will be displayed in red. Also, when the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines with an 80% probability that the title displayed at the start of the Weak Super Reach reach effect will be displayed in white, and with a 20% probability that the title displayed at the start of the Weak Super Reach reach effect will be displayed in red.

Furthermore, when the weak super reach title effect setting process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for the weak super reach title effect that corresponds to the determined title color of each reach effect, and in the variable display effect process, controls the display of images on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, etc., based on the selected process table.

(Strong Super Reach title effect setting processing)
When starting the variable display of the strong super reach variable pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-19, PB1-2 to PB1-17), in the strong super reach title performance setting process (step 003SGS311), the performance control CPU 120 identifies the variable display result of the variable display that starts from the data read out in step 003SGS306, and determines the performance pattern of the strong super reach title performance (the display color of the title displayed at the start of the strong super reach reach performance) based on these variable display results.

As shown in Figure 40 (B), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines with a 30% probability that the title displayed at the start of the Strong Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in white, and with a 70% probability that the title displayed at the start of the Strong Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in red. Also, when the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines with a 90% probability that the title displayed at the start of the Strong Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in white, and with a 10% probability that the title displayed at the start of the Strong Super Reach reach performance will be displayed in red.

In other words, when the reach effect of a weak super reach or a strong super reach begins, if the title is displayed in red, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation rate) is set higher than when the title is displayed in white. Also, when the title is displayed in red at the start of the reach effect of a strong super reach, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation rate) is set higher than when the title is displayed in red at the start of the reach effect of a weak super reach.

Furthermore, when the strong super reach title effect setting process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for the strong super reach title effect that corresponds to the determined title color of each reach effect, and in the variable display effect process, controls the display of images on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, etc., based on the selected process table.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
When starting the variable display of the strong super reach variable pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-19, PB1-2 to PB1-17), in the strong super reach title performance setting process (step 003SGS311), the performance control CPU 120 identifies the variable display result of the variable display that starts from the data read out in step 003SGS306, and determines whether or not to execute a cut-in performance and the performance pattern of the cut-in performance (the characters to be displayed in the cut-in performance) based on these variable display results.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the cut-in effect with a 10% probability, determines to display the word "Hot!" as the cut-in effect with a 20% probability, and determines to display the word "Super Hot!" as the cut-in effect with a 70% probability. Also, when the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the cut-in effect with a 60% probability, determines to display the word "Hot!" as the cut-in effect with a 35% probability, and determines to display the word "Super Hot!" as the cut-in effect with a 5% probability.

In other words, during the execution of a Strong Super Reach reach effect, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is set to be highest when the word "Super Hot!" is displayed as a cut-in effect, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is set to be lowest when no cut-in effect is executed (jackpot expectation during Strong Super Reach effect: "Super Hot!" display > "Hot!" display > no display (cut-in effect not executed)).

Furthermore, when it is decided to execute a cut-in effect in the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table for the cut-in effect corresponding to the characters to be displayed as the cut-in effect, and in the variable display effect process, controls the display of the image on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9, etc., based on the selected process table.

(Flow of the performance)
As described above, in this embodiment, the effects executed at the start of the variable display differ depending on the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result, and for some effects, the execution rate differs depending on the variable display result.

Here, we will explain the execution order and timing of each effect in this embodiment, using variable display in a low base state as an example.

First, as shown in Figures 105 (A1) to 105 (A3), if it is determined at the start of the variable display that a decorative symbol enlargement effect will be executed at the start of the variable display, the decorative symbol enlargement effect will be executed. Then, as shown in Figures 105 (A4) to (A6), if it is determined at the start of the variable display that a dialogue preview effect (first dialogue preview effect or second dialogue preview effect) will be executed, a dialogue preview effect including a preview button effect will be executed.

Next, if the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern that includes the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, the pseudo-consecutive effect is executed as shown in Figures 105 (A7) to 105 (A15) and 106 (A16) to 106 (A27). Note that while the pseudo-consecutive effect is executed once or twice in Figures 105 (A7) to 105 (A15) and 106 (A16) to 106 (A27), the pseudo-consecutive effect may be executed up to three times depending on the variation pattern. Then, as shown in Figures 106 (A28) to 106 (A31), after a maximum of three pseudo-consecutive effects have been executed, the decorative symbols on the left and right stop in a reach-like state, and a normal reach-like effect is executed. Note that if the pseudo-consecutive effect has been executed 0 to 2 times in the variable display, the decorative symbols stop in a losing combination as a result of the normal reach-like effect, and the variable display ends.

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive effects are executed three times in the variable display, the normal reach effect will transition to a weak super reach effect, as shown in Figures 107 (A30) to 107 (A36). For the weak super reach effect, a weak super reach title effect will first be executed, as shown in Figures 107 (A33) and 107 (A34). Furthermore, if the variable display is a variable display based on a strong super reach variation pattern, a message will be displayed indicating that the weak super reach effect will develop into a strong super reach effect (see Figure 107 (A36)), and then a development effect will be executed, as shown in Figures 107 (A37) to 107 (A39).

Incidentally, if the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach miss, then, although not specifically shown, a weak super reach effect is displayed to indicate that it will not progress to a strong super reach effect (in the case of a weak super reach effect in this embodiment, an image in which at least one bowling pin remains down is displayed instead of the image in which all bowling pins have fallen in Figure 107 (A38)), and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

After the development effect is executed, a strong super reach effect is executed, as shown in Figures 107 (A40) to 107 (A47) and 108 (A48) to 108 (A54). As a strong super reach effect, first, a strong super reach title effect is executed, as shown in Figures 107 (A40) and 107 (A41). Then, if it has been decided to execute a cut-in effect at the start of the variable display, as the strong super reach effect progresses after the strong super reach title effect, a cut-in effect including a preview button effect is executed, as shown in Figures 107 (A45) to 107 (A47).

As the Strong Super Reach effect progresses further, a Decisive Button effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 108 (A51). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B in the Decisive Button effect, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, a message indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot (in this embodiment, an image of an ally character defeating an enemy character, as shown in FIG. 108 (A52) to FIG. 108 (A54)) is displayed, and further movement of the movable body 32 is executed. Then, after the Strong Super Reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot is displayed as a symbol alignment effect, as shown in FIG. 108 (A54) to FIG. 108 (A57).

If the variable display result is a miss, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B in the deciding button effect, or when the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends, a message is displayed indicating that the variable display result is a miss (in this embodiment, an image of the ally character not defeating the enemy character and the screen cracking, as shown in Figures 108 (A58) to 108 (A61)), and a stop display with a missing combination of decorative symbols is executed, and the variable display ends.

Although not shown in Figures 105 to 108, if the variable display result is a miss, a symbol stop expansion effect is executed for each decorative symbol that stops, and in a jackpot game state or high base state, which is controlled based on the variable display result being a jackpot, effects such as the first right-hit display effect, second right-hit display effect, fanfare effect, V challenge effect, V challenge success effect, V prize winning effect, pending consecutive suggestion effect, pending consecutive notification effect, first prize ball number notification effect, second prize ball notification effect, and ending effect are executed. Furthermore, in a low base state that has just transitioned from a high base state, a first left-hit display effect is executed. Furthermore, if a game ball is hit into the right game area 2R in a low base state, a second left-hit display effect is executed.

(Performance of each performance)
Next, the presentation modes of each presentation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained.

(Image enlargement effect when variable display starts)
First, if it is determined that the enlarged symbol effect will not be performed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, as shown in Figures 42(A) to 42(F) and 100(A) to 100(E), the variable display (scrolling display) begins in the order of the decorative symbol displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol displayed in the "center" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, the decorative symbols are not enlarged in response to the start of the variable display. Then, after a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed in all decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the high-speed variable display of each decorative symbol begins. Note that the variable display of the decorative symbols shown in Figures 42(A) to 42(F) and 43(A) to 43(G) is not performed when the variation pattern PA1-2 is determined. At the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols based on the variation pattern PA1-2, the decorative symbols start scrolling simultaneously without changing the display size or displaying effects. By doing so, the variable display of the decorative symbols can be started smoothly without taking extra time for the shortened variation.

When the variable display start symbol enlargement effect is not being executed, a decorative effect SE0 is displayed for the decorative symbol that starts variable display at the timing when the variable display of each decorative symbol begins. It is also possible to display an enlargement effect for each decorative symbol that starts variable display when the variable display start symbol enlargement effect is not being executed. However, as shown in Figures 100(A') to 100(E'), in order to ensure the visibility of the variable display of each decorative symbol, it is necessary to start the variable display of the decorative symbol after the enlargement effect display has finished. Therefore, if the enlargement effect is displayed for all decorative symbols on the left, right, and center, it would take longer for all effects to finish displaying than if the decorative effect SE0 were displayed. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the variable display start symbol enlargement effect is not being executed, a decorative effect, rather than an enlargement effect, is displayed for the decorative symbol.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a variable display symbol enlargement effect will be performed at the start of the variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in Figures 43(A) to 43(F), the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols displayed in the "center" decorative symbol display area 5C are enlarged simultaneously. Furthermore, when these decorative symbols are enlarged, a circular decorative effect SE1 (the first effect in this invention) is displayed for each decorative symbol. Then, once the display of the decorative effect SE1 for each decorative symbol has ended, the variable display of each decorative symbol begins simultaneously. Note that the decorative effect SE1 gradually expands after its display begins, but disappears before it overlaps with the pending memory count, small symbols, and the second right-hit display MH2 (described below).

(Expanding effect when the pattern stops)
When a decorative symbol stops, a symbol stop expansion effect is executed. In the symbol stop expansion effect, as shown in FIGS. 44(A) to 44(L) and 45(M) and 45(N), first, a decorative symbol (left symbol) stops in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L. At this time, the decorative symbol (left symbol) is enlarged and a decorative effect SE2 is displayed for the decorative symbol. Next, a decorative symbol (right symbol) stops in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. At this time, the decorative symbol (right symbol) is enlarged and a decorative effect SE2 is displayed for the decorative symbol. Then, a decorative symbol (middle symbol) stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, the decorative symbol (middle symbol) is enlarged and a decorative effect SE2 is displayed for the decorative symbol. When the display of the decorative effect SE2 targeting the "medium" decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5C ends, the variable display ends, and the active display corresponding to that variable display is erased in the active display area 5F. The decorative effect SE2 gradually expands after its display begins, but disappears before it overlaps with the reserved memory count, small symbols, and the second right-hit display MH2 (described later). The display period of the decorative effect SE2 is set shorter than that of the decorative effect SE1, allowing for appropriate excitement in the game without excessively raising the player's expectations just before the variable display ends.

Note that Figures 44 and 45 show examples of a form in which the enlarged display of each decorative symbol and the display of a decorative effect are executed in response to the stopping of each decorative symbol in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. However, the above form is an enlargement effect when a symbol stops in a variable display in a non-reach or normal reach variable pattern. As an enlargement effect when a symbol stops in a variable display in a super reach variable pattern, when a decorative symbol stops in the "center" decorative symbol display area 5C, the enlargement of the decorative symbol and the display of a decorative effect SE2 targeted at that decorative symbol are not executed.

In addition, in the expansion effect when a symbol stops, as shown in Figures 101(A) to 101(E) and 102(F), a form in which a decorative effect SE2 is displayed on the decorative symbol is shown as an example. This is because, if an expansion effect were displayed on the decorative symbol, as shown in Figures 101(A') to 101(E'), 102(F') and 102(G'), the high frequency of the expansion effect when a symbol stops would unnecessarily increase the player's anticipation of being controlled into a jackpot game state. Furthermore, depending on the timing of the stop of each decorative symbol, multiple expansion effects may be displayed simultaneously, reducing the visibility of the decorative symbol. To prevent this, if an attempt is made to display the expansion effects for each decorative symbol so that their display periods do not overlap, it would end up taking longer to complete the display of all the expansion effects than if only decorative effects were displayed.

(First line preview, second line preview)
When it has been decided that a dialogue preview effect will be executed during the variable display, as shown in Figures 46(A) to 46(F) and 47(A) to 47(F), during the variable display of the decorative symbols (or before the reach-to-win transition if the variable display is during the reach-to-win transition pattern), a preview button effect is first executed as part of the first dialogue preview effect or the second dialogue preview effect. As the preview button effect, a light-emitting effect HE1, which is a type of decorative effect, is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 (substantially the same position as the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). After a predetermined period (e.g., one second) has elapsed since the start of the display of the light-emitting effect HE1, an operation prompting image SS1 (an image of the push button 31B) is displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B, and the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B begins. 46(E) and 47(E), at the start of the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B, the light-emitting effect HE1 is left slightly displayed to the extent that the visibility of the operation prompting image SS1 is not impaired. In this way, the light-emitting effect HE1 and the operation prompting image SS1 can enhance the dramatic effect while appropriately indicating the start of the operation acceptance period.

In this embodiment, the operation prompt image SS1 in the preview button effect is displayed as an animation that repeatedly switches between a first display in which the image of the push button 31B protrudes and a second display in which the image of the push button 31B recesses during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (see FIGS. 46(F), 46(G), 47(F), and 47(G)). At this time, a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light at a first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that protrudes in the first display, and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light at a second brightness higher than the first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that recesses in the second display. Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends, the animation ends, and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect, is displayed along with the image of the recessed push button 31B (see FIGS. 46(G) and 47(G)).

If it has been decided that the first line preview effect will be executed, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends, as shown in Figures 46(G) to 46(L), from the timing when the preview button effect ends, the character image CA1 will move from the top to the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the line images CG1A, CG1B will move from the left and right to the center of the display area of the image display device 5 according to the effect pattern. Then, when the movement of the character image CA1 and line images CG1A, CG1B has ended, the enlargement effect KE1 according to the line images CG1A, CG1B will be displayed.

As shown in Figures 87 (B) and 95 (P), the first dialogue preview effect in this embodiment is an effect in which an enlargement effect KE1 targeting dialogue images CG1A and CG1B is enlarged and displayed so as to diffuse from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 outward from the display area. In particular, the enlargement effect KE1 is enlarged so that the distance of movement is greater left and right than up and down as it is enlarged, so that it does not overlap with display areas displaying game-related information, such as the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S, before the display ends. In other words, the display period of enlargement effect KE1 ends before it overlaps with any of the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S as it is enlarged.

As shown in Figure 95 (P), when the first line preview performance is performed in a high base state, the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, but the enlargement effect KE1 is also an enlargement effect that does not overlap with the second right-hit display MH2 during the enlargement display process.

Furthermore, if it has been decided that the second line preview effect will be executed, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends, as shown in Figures 47(G) to 47(L), the character image CA2 will be displayed moving from the left side to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5 from the timing when the preview button effect ends. Then, when the movement of the character image CA2 ends (the character reaches the right side of the display area), the line image CG2 will be displayed according to the effect pattern. Furthermore, a decorative effect SE3 is displayed around the line image in the form of a speech bubble surrounding the line image.

Note that Figures 46 and 47 show the first and second dialogue preview effects when the game state is in a low base state, but as shown in Figures 61 and 62, these first and second dialogue preview effects can also be executed during variable display when the game state is in a high base state.

In this embodiment, the line preview effect can be executed when the game state is in a low base state or a high base state, and Figures 46 and 47 show the line preview effect when the game state is in a low base state. As shown in Figures 61 and 62, the first line preview effect and the second line preview effect when the game state is in a high base state differ from those in the low base state in that the background image displayed is different and a second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, but the presentation format is the same. In this embodiment, the presentation manner of the dialogue preview performance is the same in the low base state and the high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first dialogue preview performance may be executed in the low base state, and the second dialogue preview performance may be executed in the high base state. Alternatively, the first dialogue preview performance and the second dialogue preview performance may be executed in the low base state, and in the high base state, a third dialogue preview performance (with magnification effect, without decorative effect) in which a different character than in the first dialogue preview performance appears, and a fourth dialogue preview performance (without magnification effect, with decorative effect) in which a different character than in the second dialogue preview performance appears may be executed.

As described above, the first dialogue preview performance and the second dialogue preview performance in this embodiment are similar in that they are both performances in which a character and dialogue image are displayed on the image display device 5. However, as shown in Figures 122(A) and 122(B), the first dialogue preview performance is a performance in which an enlargement effect KE1 modeled after dialogue images CG1A and CG1B is displayed, while the second dialogue preview performance is a performance in which a decorative effect SE3 shaped to surround dialogue image CG2 is displayed. Furthermore, the display period for dialogue images CG1A and CG1B in the first dialogue preview performance is 4 seconds, including the movement period (0.5 seconds) of dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, and the display period for dialogue image CG2 in the second dialogue preview performance is 6 seconds from the timing at which character image CA2 completes its movement. That is, in the first dialogue preview performance, by displaying an enlargement effect KE1 that resembles the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B are more likely to leave a lasting impression on the player even during a short display period. Also, the number of characters that make up the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B in the first dialogue preview performance is smaller than the number of characters that make up the dialogue image CG2 in the second dialogue preview performance. That is, in the first dialogue preview performance, by displaying an enlargement effect KE1 that resembles each of the characters that make up the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B are more likely to leave a lasting impression on the player even though they are composed of a small number of characters. 39, the first dialogue preview effect has two presentation patterns: one that displays an image of dialogue A (dialogue images CG1A and CG1B) and one that displays an image of dialogue B. In both patterns, the display period of the dialogue image is four seconds, including the movement period, and although the number of characters constituting each dialogue image differs between dialogue A and dialogue B, both have fewer characters than dialogue C and dialogue D. Furthermore, whether the first dialogue preview effect is executed in either the pattern that displays dialogue A or the pattern that displays dialogue B, an enlargement effect imitating the dialogue image corresponding to each pattern is displayed, and the enlargement effect corresponding to the image of dialogue A is displayed in a manner that imitates the entire image of dialogue A (the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B themselves), and the enlargement effect corresponding to the image of dialogue B is displayed in a manner that imitates a part of the image of dialogue B (for example, only one character out of the multiple characters constituting dialogue B, or only the outline of the image of dialogue B).

(Pseudo consecutive effects)
When a pseudo-continuous effect is executed during variable display, as shown in FIGS. 48(A) to 48(J), first, the decorative symbols temporarily stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. In this state, in the "center" decorative symbol display area 5C, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed moving from the top to the center of the display area of the image display device 5. When the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop in the "center" decorative symbol display area 5C, the pseudo-continuous symbols are enlarged and an enlargement effect KE2 is displayed targeting the pseudo-continuous symbols. Then, when the enlargement effect KE2 targeting the enlarged pseudo-continuous symbols ends, the enlarged pseudo-continuous symbols are reduced in size. At this time, when the reduced display of the pseudo-continuous symbols ends, an enlargement effect KE3 targeting the reduced pseudo-continuous symbols is displayed. Although not shown, in FIG. 48(D), the vibration display of the pseudo-continuous symbols begins when the pseudo-continuous symbols are fully enlarged. As shown in the figure, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are fully enlarged, the display of the enlargement effect KE3 starts without being affected by the vibration display of the pseudo consecutive symbols. The vibration display of the pseudo consecutive symbols continues even during the display period of the enlargement effect KE3, and ends after the display of the enlargement effect KE3 ends, before the pseudo consecutive symbols are reduced in size.

Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during variable display, as shown in Figures 49(A) to 49(D), the decorative symbols will temporarily stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, but in the "center" decorative symbol display area 5C, the pseudo consecutive performance will not temporarily stop and a decorative symbol corresponding to the combination that results in a miss will stop. At this time, effects such as decorative effect SE2 are not displayed to avoid excessive disappointment when the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed.

As shown in Figure 88 (A), the pseudo-consecutive effect in this embodiment is an effect in which enlargement effects KE2 and KE3 targeting the pseudo-consecutive symbols are enlarged equally in the vertical and horizontal directions from the center of the display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, these enlargement effects KE2 and KE3 are enlargement effects whose display period ends before they overlap with any of the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S during the enlargement process. As described below, the display period of enlargement effect KE2 and the display period of enlargement effect KE3 are the same length, but the display periods of enlargement effects KE2 and KE3 are different from the display period of enlargement effect KE1 (enlargement effects KE2 and KE3 > enlargement effect KE1). In the first dialogue preview effect, the player needs to read the multiple characters that make up the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B within a short period of time, so the display period of enlargement effect KE1 is set shorter than the display periods of enlargement effects KE2 and KE3. Additionally, the magnification rate of the magnification effect, the speed at which the magnification effect itself expands, and the speed at which the transparency increases differ between magnification effect KE1 and magnification effects KE2 and KE3 (magnification effect KE1 > magnification effect KE2 and KE3). In this way, even within a magnification effect, the display period, magnification speed, transparency speed, etc. differ depending on the scene being displayed, making it possible to effectively highlight the target image using a wide variety of magnification effects.

(Normal reach effect)
When a normal reach effect is executed during variable display, as shown in Figures 50(A) to 50(L), first, decorative symbols stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At this time, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped in these decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are enlarged, and an enlargement effect KE4 is displayed targeting these decorative symbols. Here, if the variable display is not a variable display in a normal reach miss variable pattern, the character base of the decorative symbol is not displayed, and the number portion of the decorative symbol stopped in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L moves to the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, and the number portion of the decorative symbol stopped in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R moves to the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5. Then, when the number portion of these decorative symbols reaches the upper left or upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, an enlargement effect KE5 is displayed targeting the number portion of these decorative symbols. After this, the game transitions to the Super Reach reach effect (weak Super Reach effect or strong Super Reach effect). Since the expansion effects KE4 and KE5 vary depending on the type of decorative symbol involved, the wide variety of expansion effects according to the type of decorative symbol in the reach state can favorably enhance the effect at the start of the normal reach effect. Furthermore, the display period of the expansion effect KE4 is different from that of the expansion effect KE5 (expansion effect KE4 > expansion effect KE5). Since the expansion effect KE4 is displayed when the decorative symbol enters the reach state, setting the display period longer effectively indicates to the player that the normal reach effect has begun and that there is a chance. In contrast, the display period of the expansion effect KE5 is set shorter, taking into consideration that the development into the SP reach occurs immediately after each decorative symbol moves to the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, the magnification rate of the magnification effect, the speed at which the magnification effect itself expands, and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ between magnification effect KE4 and magnification effect KE5 (magnification effect KE5 > magnification effect KE4). When the variable display is a variable display with a variable pattern for a normal reach miss, in the scene shown in Figure 50 (H), a decorative symbol of a different type from the decorative symbols stopped in decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R stops in decorative symbol display area 5C. In this case, by not displaying the decorative effect and magnification effect targeted at the decorative symbol stopped in decorative symbol display area 5C, the failure of the normal reach effect is not overly emphasized. However, this is not limited to this, and a decorative effect for a reach miss that is emphasized less than the decorative effects associated with other effects may be displayed to appropriately enhance the effect.

As shown in Figure 88 (B), the normal reach presentation in this embodiment is a presentation in which an expansion effect KE4 targeting the left and right decorative symbols is expanded vertically and horizontally from the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, these expansion effects KE4 are expansion effects whose display period ends before they overlap with any of the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S during the process of being expanded.

Comparing the variable display start decorative symbol expansion effect and the normal reach effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 124(A) and 124(B), both effects display decorative symbols and effects targeted at these decorative symbols. However, the variable display start decorative symbol expansion effect displays a circular decorative effect SE1 that is different in shape from the decorative symbols, while the normal reach effect displays an expansion effect KE4 that is similar in shape to the decorative symbols. The display period of the expansion effect KE4 is shorter than that of the decorative effect SE1, effectively indicating to the player that a chance exists even in a short period of time. Furthermore, the development cost of the expansion effect KE4 is lower than that of the decorative effect SE1. Specifically, the decorative effect SE1 requires the preparation of dedicated material data and then processing that material data as appropriate, which requires a certain amount of time to create. However, the expansion effect KE4 can be created by reusing the material data of the decorative symbols, which allows it to be created in a short period of time.

Comparing the symbol stop expansion effect and the normal reach effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 126(A) and 126(B), both effects display decorative symbols and display effects targeted at these decorative symbols. However, the symbol stop expansion effect displays an elliptical decorative effect SE2 that is different in shape from the decorative symbols, while the normal reach effect displays an expansion effect KE4 that is similar in shape to the decorative symbols. The display period for the expansion effect KE5 is shorter than that for the decorative effect SE2, effectively indicating to the player that a chance exists even in a short period of time. Furthermore, the development cost of the expansion effect KE5 is lower than that of the decorative effect SE2. Specifically, the decorative effect SE2 requires the preparation of dedicated material data and then processing that material data as appropriate, which requires a certain amount of time to create. However, the expansion effect KE5 can be created by reusing the material data of the decorative symbols, which allows it to be created in a short period of time.

(Weak Super Reach effect, Weak Super Reach title effect)
When a weak super reach effect is executed during variable display, first, as shown in Figures 51(A) to 51(G) and 51(E') to 51(G'), as a weak super reach title effect, a title image of the weak super reach effect is displayed together with an initial image of the weak super reach effect on the image display device 5. As the title image of the weak super reach effect, either a white title image TG1 or a red title image TG1 is displayed, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot differs depending on which image is displayed.

Furthermore, after the appearance animation of the title image TG1 of the weak super reach effect is completed, an expansion effect KE6 is displayed targeting the title image TG1 of the weak super reach effect. There are two types of expansion effect KE6: a white expansion effect KE6 targeting the white title image TG1, and a red expansion effect KE6 targeting the red title image TG1. There is no difference in the display period or display pattern, but the type of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the display period of the expansion effect KE6 and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 differ when the white expansion effect KE6 is displayed and when the red expansion effect KE6 is displayed. Note that in this embodiment, there is no difference in the display pattern between the white expansion effect KE6 and the red expansion effect KE6, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the red expansion effect KE6 is displayed, the red expansion effect KE6 may be displayed more frequently than the white expansion effect KE6 during the display period of the red title image TG1, or a decorative effect may be displayed in addition to the red expansion effect KE6.

As shown in Figure 89 (E), the weak super reach title effect in this embodiment is an effect in which an enlargement effect KE6 targeting the title image TG1 is enlarged and displayed so as to diffuse downward and left and right in the display area of the image display device 5. The display of the enlargement effect KE6 begins at the same position as the title image TG1, and because the title image TG1 is displayed below the display area 5S in the display area of the image display device 5, the enlargement effect KE6 does not overlap with the display area 5S as it is enlarged. Furthermore, the display period of the enlargement effect KE6 ends before it overlaps with either the special reserved memory display area 5U or the active display area 5F. Furthermore, unlike the enlargement effects KE1 to KE5, the enlargement effect KE6 is displayed multiple times during the display period of the title image TG1. Furthermore, when comparing the enlargement effect KE6 with the enlargement effect KE1, which targets text as the image, the display period of the enlargement effect KE6 is longer than that of the enlargement effect KE1. This is because the display period of the title image TG1, which is the target of enlargement effect KE6, is longer than the display period of the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, which are the target of enlargement effect KE1. Additionally, the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect, the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands, and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ between enlargement effect KE1 and enlargement effect KE6 (enlargement effect KE1 > enlargement effect KE6). In this way, even within an enlargement effect, the display period, number of times it is displayed, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. differ depending on the scene being displayed, so the target image can be made to stand out effectively using a wide variety of enlargement effects.

After the Weak Super Reach title effect ends, as shown in Figures 52(A) to 52(C), the image display device 5 begins displaying the effect image of the Weak Super Reach effect (in this embodiment, an effect image of bowling pins being knocked down). At this time, if the variable display is a variable display with a variable display pattern corresponding to a Weak Super Reach miss, an image corresponding to the variable display result being a miss without progressing to a Strong Super Reach effect (an effect image in which none of the bowling pins are knocked down) is displayed, as shown in Figures 52(D) to 52(E), and the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a miss, ending the variable display. At this time, by not displaying decorative effects or magnification effects for decorative symbols that stop in a miss combination, the failure of the Weak Super Reach effect is not overly emphasized. However, this is not limited to this, and a decorative effect for a reach miss that is emphasized less than the decorative effects associated with other effects may be displayed to appropriately enhance the effect. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of a Strong Super Reach miss or a Strong Super Reach jackpot, an image corresponding to the development of the Weak Super Reach effect into a Strong Super Reach effect (the image of all the bowling pins knocked down as shown in Figure 53 (A)) will be displayed.

In this embodiment, the weak super reach performance is exemplified as a form in which no enlargement or decorative effects are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and enlargement or decorative effects may be displayed on any of the images displayed in the weak super reach performance.

(Developmental performance)
As described above, when an image corresponding to the development of a weak super reach effect into a strong super reach effect is displayed, a further development effect is executed. As shown in Figures 53(A) to 53(G), after an image corresponding to the development of a weak super reach effect into a strong super reach effect is displayed, the word "development" is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. When the word "development" stops in the center of the display area, a flame effect is first displayed around the word "development" as a decorative effect SE4, and then an enlargement effect KE8 targeting the word "development" is displayed. Note that when comparing the enlargement effect KE8 with the enlargement effect KE1, in which the image targeted by the enlargement effect is text, the display period of the enlargement effect KE8 is longer than the display period of the enlargement effect KE1. This is because the display period of the title image TG1, which is the target of the enlargement effect KE8, is longer than the display period of the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, which are the target of the enlargement effect KE1. In addition, the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect, the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands, and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ between enlargement effect KE1 and enlargement effect KE8 (enlargement effect KE1 > enlargement effect KE8). Furthermore, when comparing enlargement effect KE8 with enlargement effect KE6, which uses text as the target image of the enlargement effect, the display period and enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect differ, as do the speeds at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases (enlargement effect KE6 > enlargement effect KE8). Thus, because the display period, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc., differ depending on the scene being displayed within the enlargement effect, a wide variety of enlargement effects can be used to effectively highlight the target image.

As shown in Figures 53(D) and 53(E), the decorative effect in the development performance is enlarged in accordance with the progress of the display (enlarged display) of the enlargement effect KE8. As shown in Figures 53(F) and 53(G), the enlargement display of the decorative effect SE4 continues even after the display of the enlargement effect has ended, and eventually the image of the weak super reach performance and the word "development" are hidden by the decorative effect.

As shown in Figure 89 (F), the development effect in this embodiment is an effect in which an enlargement effect KE8 targeting the word "development" is enlarged vertically and horizontally from the center of the image display device 5. The display period of the enlargement effect KE8 ends before it overlaps with any of the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, the active display area 5F, or the display area 5S. On the other hand, the decorative effect SE4 in the development effect is a decorative effect displayed over a wider display area than the enlargement effect KE8, and is a decorative effect that overlaps with the decorative patterns displayed in the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, the active display area 5F, the display area 5S, and the upper right corner of the display area.

(Strong Super Reach Title Production)
54(A) to 54(G) and 55(A) to 55(G), in the strong super reach title effect, first, the display of the character image CA3 and the reach title image TG3 of the strong super reach effect according to the variation pattern starts in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the reach title image TG3 in the strong super reach title effect is displayed in white or red, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the reach title image TG3 is displayed.

Furthermore, the character image CA3 and reach title image TG3 are gradually enlarged over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) from the start of display. When the character image CA3 and reach title image TG3 reach a predetermined size and the enlargement ends, an enlargement effect KE9 is displayed on the enlarged reach title image TG3. A decorative effect SE5 also begins to be displayed around the reach title image TG3 after the enlargement effect KE9 begins to be displayed. When the enlargement effect KE9 and decorative effect SE5 end, a battle effect between an ally character and an enemy character begins as a strong super reach effect according to the variation pattern (see Figure 54 (G)). Note that the type of sound output from speakers 8L and 8R during the enlargement effect KE9 display period and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 differ depending on whether the white enlargement effect KE9 is displayed or the red enlargement effect KE9 is displayed. Moreover, unlike the enlargement effects KE1 to KE5 and KE8, the enlargement effect KE9 is displayed multiple times during the display period of the reach title image TG3. Furthermore, when comparing the enlargement effect KE9 with the enlargement effect KE1, which targets text as the image subject of the enlargement effect, the display period of the enlargement effect KE9 is longer than that of the enlargement effect KE1. This is because the display period of the reach title image TG3, which is the target of the enlargement effect KE9, is longer than the display period of the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, which are the target of the enlargement effect KE1. The enlargement effect KE1 and the enlargement effect KE9 also differ in the enlargement rate, the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands, and the speed at which the transparency increases (enlargement effect KE1 > enlargement effect KE9). Furthermore, when comparing the enlargement effect KE9 with the enlargement effect KE6, which targets text as the image subject of the enlargement effect, the display period and the enlargement rate of the enlargement effect differ, as do the speeds at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases (enlargement effect KE9 > enlargement effect KE6). Furthermore, when comparing enlargement effect KE9 with enlargement effect KE8, which uses text as the target image, not only are the display period and enlargement ratio different, but the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the rate at which the transparency increases also differ (enlargement effect KE9 > enlargement effect KE8). In this way, even within an enlargement effect, the display period, number of times it is displayed, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. vary depending on the scene in which it is displayed, making it possible to effectively highlight the target image using a wide variety of enlargement effects.

In this embodiment, the strong super reach title effect can be executed when the game state is in a low base state or a high base state, and Figures 54 and 55 show the strong super reach title effect when the game state is in a low base state. As shown in Figures 64 and 65, when the game state is in a high base state, the strong super reach title effect is different in that a second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, but the effect format is the same.

In the strong super reach title presentation in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 54(C) to 54(E) and 55(C) to 55(E), the decorative effect SE5 is displayed in the same manner regardless of the color of the text in the reach title image TG3, i.e., the percentage of the game controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative effect SE5 may be displayed in different manners depending on the color of the text in the reach title image TG3. By doing so, the percentage of the game controlled to a jackpot game state can be more clearly indicated to the player in addition to the color of the text in the reach title image TG3. Furthermore, in the strong super reach title presentation in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 54(C) to 54(E) and 55(C) to 55(E), the enlargement effect KE9 is displayed targeting the reach title image TG3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an enlargement effect may be displayed targeting the character image CA3.

As shown in Figures 90 (G) and 96 (R), the strong super reach title effect in this embodiment is an effect in which an enlargement effect KE9 targeting the reach title image TG3 is enlarged and displayed so as to diffuse upward and left and right in the display area of the image display device 5. The display of the enlargement effect KE9 begins from the same position as the reach title image TG3, and because the reach title image TG3 is an image displayed below the display area 5S in the display area of the image display device 5, the enlargement effect KE9 does not overlap with the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U or the active display area 5F as it is enlarged. Furthermore, as it is enlarged, the enlargement effect KE9 expands so as not to overlap with the display area 5S and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right corner of the display area during the first period of the display period, and then overlaps with the display area 5S and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right corner of the display area during the second period after the first period has elapsed.

As shown in Figure 96 (R), when a strong super reach title effect is executed in a high base state, the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and therefore the expansion effect KE9 expands during the expansion display process so as not to overlap with the second right-hit display MH2 over the first period of the display period, and is also an expansion effect that overlaps with the second right-hit display MH2 over the second period after the first period has elapsed.

In the strong super reach title presentation in this embodiment, the image display device 5 displays the character image CA3, reach title image TG3, decorative effect SE5, and enlargement effect KE9 whether the reach title image TG3 is displayed in white or red. However, as shown in Figures 123(A) and 123(B), the difference is that the enlargement effect KE9 is displayed in a color corresponding to the display color (white, red) of the reach title image TG3. In other words, when the reach title image TG3 is displayed in white, the enlargement effect KE9 targeting the reach title image TG3 is displayed in white, and when the reach title image TG3 is displayed in red, the enlargement effect KE9 targeting the reach title image TG3 is displayed in red.

(Cut-in effect)
As shown in Figures 56(A) to 56(J), 57(A) to 57(J), 96(S), and 97(T), the cut-in effect begins with a preview button effect. The preview button effect begins with the display of a light-emitting effect HE1, a type of decorative effect, in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 (similar to the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). After a predetermined period (e.g., one second) has elapsed since the start of the display of the light-emitting effect HE1, an operation prompt image SS1 (an image of the push button 31B) is displayed, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B, marking the start of the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B. Note that, similar to Figures 46(B) to 46(G) and 47(B) to 47(G), the preview button effect includes the display of the light-emitting effect HE1 and an animation in which the image of the push button 31B (described later) alternates between a first display in which the image protrudes and a second display in which the image recedes.

In this embodiment, the operation prompt image SS1 in the preview button effect is displayed as an animation in which the image of the push button 31B repeatedly switches between a first display in which the image protrudes and a second display in which the image of the push button 31B is recessed, as shown in Figures 56(F), 56(G), 57(F), and 57(G), during the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B. At this time, a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light at a first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that protrudes in the first display, and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light at a second brightness higher than the first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that is recessed in the second display. Although not shown, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B or when the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends, the animation ends, and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect (see Figures 46(G) and 47(G)), is displayed together with the image of the recessed push button 31B, as shown in the scenes of Figures 56(H) and 57(H).

When the player operates push button 31B during the operation acceptance period for push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period for push button 31B ends, the preview button effect ends and a cut-in effect is displayed in which images KG1 and KG2 (the text "Hot!!" or "Super Hot!!") corresponding to the effect pattern are displayed. At this time, enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 are displayed targeting images KG1 and K2 corresponding to the effect pattern. Note that the enlargement effect begins to be displayed in the scenes of Figures 56(I) and 57(I) after the fragment effect of Figures 56(H) and 57(H) has disappeared, so the enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 are not displayed intermixed with the fragment effect, enhancing the effects of both effects. Additionally, the display period for images KG1 and KG2 is 4 seconds from the time the player operates push button 31B during the operation acceptance period for push button 31B or from the time the operation acceptance period for push button 31B ends, the display period for the fragment effect is 1 second, and the display period for enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 is 1 second.

In this embodiment, the cut-in effect can be executed when the game state is in a low base state or a high base state, and Figures 56 and 57 show the cut-in effect when the game state is in a low base state. As shown in Figure 66, the cut-in effect when the game state is in a high base state differs in that a second right-hit display MH2 instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, but the presentation is the same. Although not shown, the cut-in effect in a high base state is also executed when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends.

Also, as shown in Figures 90(H), 91(I), 96(S), and 97(T), the cut-in effect in this embodiment is an effect in which enlargement effects KE10 and KE11, which target images KG1 and KG2 according to the effect pattern, are enlarged vertically and horizontally from the center of the image display device 5. Enlargement effect KE10 overlaps with the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5, but is also an enlargement effect whose display period ends before it overlaps with any of the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S. On the other hand, enlargement effect KE11 overlaps with the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 and is ultimately displayed as an image larger than enlargement effect KE10 (enlargement effect KE11 is an image with a larger magnification ratio than enlargement effect KE10), and is ultimately displayed as an enlargement effect that overlaps with the decorative pattern displayed in the active display area 5F, display area 5S, and the upper right portion of the display area. Furthermore, the enlargement effect KE11 is also an enlargement effect that is displayed overlapping with the second right-hit display MH2 displayed in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 when the game state is in a high base state. The types of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the display period of the enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 differ between the enlargement effect KE10 and the enlargement effect KE11. Furthermore, when comparing the enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 with the enlargement effect KE1, which uses text as the target image, the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect differ, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ between the enlargement effects KE1 and KE10 and KE11 (enlargement effect KE1 > enlargement effect KE11 > enlargement effect KE10). Furthermore, when comparing enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 with enlargement effect KE6, which targets text, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect differ, as do the speeds at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases (enlargement effect KE11 > enlargement effect KE6 > enlargement effect KE10). When comparing enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 with enlargement effect KE8, which targets text, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect differ, as do the speeds at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases (enlargement effect KE11 > enlargement effect KE10 > enlargement effect KE8). When comparing enlargement effects KE10 and KE11 with enlargement effect KE9, which targets text, the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect differ, as do the speeds at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases (enlargement effect KE11 > enlargement effect KE9 > enlargement effect KE10). In this way, the display period, enlargement speed, and transparency speed of the enlargement effect vary depending on the scene being displayed, allowing for a wide variety of enlargement effects to effectively highlight the target image.

(Decision button effect)
At the end of the strong super reach effect, a deciding button effect is executed. As shown in FIGS. 58(A) to 58(H), the deciding button effect involves displaying, in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, an operation prompting image SS2 (an image of the push button 31B) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, and a light-emitting effect HE2 targeting the operation prompting image SS2. More specifically, in the deciding button effect, the light-emitting effect HE2 is first displayed, and then the operation prompting image SS2 is displayed while the light-emitting effect HE2 is being displayed. The light-emitting effect HE2 in the deciding button effect emits light with a higher brightness (stronger light) than the light-emitting effect HE1 in the preview button effect described above. The display period (4 seconds) during which the operation prompting image SS2 and the light-emitting effect HE2 are displayed is set to be longer than the display period (2 seconds) during which the operation prompting image SS1 and the light-emitting effect HE1 are displayed.

In this embodiment, the operation prompt image SS2 in the deciding button effect is displayed as an animation that repeatedly switches between a first display in which the image of the push button 31B protrudes and a second display in which the image of the push button 31B recesses, as shown in Figures 58(G) and 58(H), during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. At this time, a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light at a first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that protrudes in the first display, and a light-emitting effect, which is a type of decorative effect that emits light at a second brightness higher than the first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that recesses in the second display. The animation of the operation prompt image SS2 is the same as that shown in Figures 46(E), 46(F), 47(E), 47(F), 56(F), 56(G), 57(F), and 57(G). In this way, while the appearance before the operation prompt image is displayed is significantly different between the preview button effect and the final button effect, after the operation prompt image is displayed, the same animation is used to display the operation prompt image, making it possible to appropriately prompt the player to operate the push button 31B while changing the impression given to the player. Furthermore, the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B in the final button effect (6 seconds) is set longer than the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B in the preview button effect (3 seconds).

In this embodiment, the deciding button effect can be executed when the game state is in a low base state or a high base state, and Figure 58 shows the deciding button effect when the game state is in a low base state. As shown in Figure 67, the deciding button effect when the game state is in a high base state differs in that a second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R, but the presentation is the same.

Then, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B, or the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends. At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, an effect image indicating a jackpot, such as an ally character defeating an enemy character, is displayed as the result of the strong super reach effect, although this is not specifically shown.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Figures 60(A) to 60(D), the result of the strong super reach effect is a performance image indicating a miss, such as an image in which the brightness of the image immediately before the start of the decide button effect is reduced, and decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a reach miss. At this time, a crack image HB1 is displayed as a decorative effect in this invention, targeting the performance image indicating a miss (see Figures 60(A) and 60(B)).

(Pattern matching effect)
If the variable display result is a jackpot, a symbol alignment effect is executed as a jackpot notification effect after the reach effect ends. As shown in FIGS. 59(A) to 59(I), the symbol alignment effect begins by enlarging the decorative symbols displayed in a jackpot combination, such as "666" or "777," in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. While these decorative symbols are enlarged, a spiral decorative effect SE6 is displayed behind the decorative symbols (see FIGS. 59(A) to 59(C)). Then, as shown in FIGS. 59(C) to 59(I), after these decorative symbols are enlarged to a predetermined size, they are reduced to their normal size (the size displayed during variable display). Once the reduced size of these decorative symbols is complete, an enlargement effect KE12 is displayed for each decorative symbol. 59(C), a decorative effect resembling electricity appears to encircle the enlarged decorative symbols; when the decorative symbols are reduced in size, the decorative effect resembling electricity disappears, and the enlarged effect KE12 is displayed. Also, in the scene of FIG. 59(I), a decorative effect is displayed as an animation in which light repeatedly moves from the lower left to the upper right over time on the surface of each decorative symbol displayed in a jackpot combination, although this is not shown. In this embodiment, the decorative symbols are displayed in a jackpot combination when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B in the decide button effect, or when the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The movable body 32 may be moved toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5 and stopped for a predetermined period when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B in the decide button effect, or when the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends. In this case, the background and decorative effect SE6 shown in Figures 59(A) to 59(C) are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 that is blocked by the movable body 32. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a return operation is initiated to return the movable body 32 to a predetermined position (origin position), and the scene in Figure 59(A) begins while the return operation of the movable body 32 is being performed, and when the scene in Figure 59(B) begins, the movable body 32 stops at the origin position. In this way, the enlarged display of the decorative pattern and the display of the enlarged effect KE12 are not blocked by the movable body 32, and the movable body 32 can appropriately notify the player that a jackpot has been won.

In this embodiment, the symbol matching effect can be executed when the game state is in a low base state or a high base state, and Figure 59 shows the symbol matching effect when the game state is in a low base state. As shown in Figure 68, the symbol matching effect when the game state is in a high base state differs in that the display mode of the decorative symbols is different, and a second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 2R. Since the display mode of the decorative symbols differs between the low base state and the high base state, the displayed enlargement effect is different (enlargement effect SE12' is displayed), and, although not shown, the type of decorative effect that is displayed to cling to the enlarged decorative symbols in the scene of Figure 68(C) is different (a decorative effect resembling a flame is displayed). On the other hand, the types of sounds output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting control of game effect lamp 9, and the decorative effect (not shown) in the form of an animation in which light repeatedly moves over time from the lower left to the upper right displayed on the surface of each decorative symbol displayed in the jackpot combination in the scenes of Figures 59(I) and 68(I) are common to both the symbol matching presentation in the low base state and the symbol matching presentation in the high base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of decorative effect SE6 in the symbol matching presentation may be different between the low base state and the high base state.

Also, as shown in Figures 91(J) and 97(U), the symbol matching effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the enlargement effect KE12 for the left, right, and center decorative symbols (the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot are enlarged vertically and horizontally. Of these enlargement effects KE12, the enlargement effect KE12 for the left decorative symbol (the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L) is an enlargement effect that, during the enlargement process, does not overlap with the display area 5S during a first period of the display period, and then overlaps with the display area 5S during a second period after the first period has elapsed. Additionally, the enlargement effect KE12 for the middle decorative pattern (the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) is an enlargement effect that, during the process of being enlarged, expands so as not to overlap with the active display area 5F and the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U over a first period of the display period, and is an enlargement effect that overlaps with the active display area 5F and the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U over a second period after the first period has elapsed, and the enlargement effect KE12 for the right decorative pattern (the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R) is an enlargement effect that overlaps with the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U over the process of being enlarged.

Furthermore, when the gaming state is in a high base state, the enlargement effect KE12' for the right decorative symbol (the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R) is enlarged so as not to overlap with the display area 5S over a first period of the display period, and is also an enlargement effect that overlaps with the display area 5S displayed in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 over a second period after the first period has elapsed. Furthermore, the enlargement effect KE12' for the left decorative symbol (the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L) is enlarged so as not to overlap with the second right-hit display MH2 displayed in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 over a first period of the display period, and is also an enlargement effect that overlaps with the second right-hit display MH2 over a second period after the first period has elapsed.

Comparing the enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of variable display and the pattern matching effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 125(A) and 125(B), both effects display decorative patterns and effects targeted at these decorative patterns, but the enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of variable display displays a circular decorative effect SE1 that has a different shape from the decorative pattern, while the pattern matching effect displays an enlarged effect KE12 that has a similar shape to the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, when comparing the enlargement effect when symbols stop and the pattern matching effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 127(A) and 127(B), both effects display decorative symbols and effects targeted at these decorative symbols, but the enlargement effect when symbols stop is an effect in which an oval decorative effect SE2 that is different in shape from the decorative symbols is displayed, and the pattern matching effect is an effect in which an enlargement effect KE12 that is similar in shape to the decorative symbols is displayed.

Furthermore, when comparing the normal reach effect and the pattern matching effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 128 (A) and 128 (B), both effects display decorative symbols and display effects targeting these decorative symbols, but the normal reach effect targets the left and right decorative symbols (two decorative symbols) and displays an enlarged effect KE4 that resembles these left and right decorative symbols, while the pattern matching effect targets the left, right, and center decorative symbols (three decorative symbols) and displays an enlarged effect KE12 that resembles these left and right center decorative symbols, ultimately larger than the enlarged effect KE4 in the normal reach effect (enlargement ratio of the enlarged effect: enlarged effect KE12 > enlarged effect KE4).

The pattern matching effect in this embodiment is the same as the normal reach effect shown in Figure 50 in that it displays an enlargement effect on decorative symbols, but it differs in that the pattern matching effect displays an enlargement effect on three decorative symbols on the left, right, and center, while the normal reach effect displays an enlargement effect on two decorative symbols on the left and right. Furthermore, the pattern matching effect ultimately displays a larger enlargement effect than the normal reach effect, and the display period, speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands, and speed at which the transparency increases are also different. In other words, the pattern matching effect and the normal reach effect are effects with different enlargement effect display patterns.

(Reach suggestion effect)
In the variable display when the gaming state is in a high base state, instead of the pseudo consecutive effects, a reach suggestion effect suggesting that a reach will occur may be executed. As a reach suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 63(A) to 63(E), first, a character CA4 is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the character CA4 acts on the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, causing a crack HB2 to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, if the variable display is a variable display based on a normal reach or super reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 63(F) and 63(G), a fragment effect is displayed by the action of the character CA4, and the left and right decorative symbols stop in a reach mode, and thereafter a reach variation effect based on the variation pattern is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display based on a non-reach fluctuation pattern, different patterns will stop as decorative patterns on the left and right, as shown in Figures 63(F') and 63(G'), and thereafter the decorative patterns will stop in a non-reach combination, and the variable display will end.

(Fanfare performance)
After the variable display result indicates a jackpot, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot gaming state, a fanfare effect is first executed to notify the gamer that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state. When the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display in the low base state, that is, when the variable display result of the first special symbol indicates a jackpot, the fanfare effect is as follows: as shown in FIGS. 69(A) to 69(I), the characters constituting the indication of a six-round jackpot (the display of the jackpot title image BG1 of "BIG BONUS!!" shown in FIGS. 69(C) to 69(I)) are sequentially displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, moving from the right side of the display area. As the characters constituting the jackpot title image BG1 are sequentially displayed, the display mode of the decorative effect in the center of the display area shown in FIG. 69(B) changes. Then, when all the characters have been moved, the display of the decorative effect ends, and an enlarged effect KE13 is displayed on the display indicating a six-round jackpot (jackpot title image BG1). Also, although not shown, in the scene of Figure 69 (I), a decorative effect is displayed on the surface of the jackpot title image BG1 as an animation in which light moves repeatedly at a predetermined cycle (1 second) from the "B" in "BIG BONUS!!" to the "!" over time.

On the other hand, when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display in the high base state, that is, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the fanfare effect is as follows: as shown in Figures 70(A) to 70(I), the characters constituting the display indicating a 10-round jackpot (the display of the jackpot title image BG2 of "SPECIAL BONUS!!" shown in Figures 70(C) to 70(I)) are displayed sequentially from the right of the display area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. As the characters constituting the jackpot title image BG2 are displayed sequentially, the display mode of the decorative effect in the center of the display area shown in Figure 70(B) changes. Then, when all the characters have been displayed and moved, the display of the decorative effect ends, and an enlarged effect KE14 is displayed targeting the display indicating a 10-round jackpot (jackpot title image BG2). The decorative effects shown in Figures 70(B) to 70(G) are images that are common to the decorative effects shown in Figures 69(B) to 69(G). Also, although not shown, in the scene in Figure 70(I), the surface of the jackpot title image BG1 displays a decorative effect in the form of an animation in which light moves repeatedly over time at a predetermined cycle (1 second) from the "S" in "SPECIAL BONUS!!" to the "!".

As shown in Figures 69 and 70, the fanfare effect in this embodiment is always executed when the second right-hit display MH2, which instructs the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, regardless of whether the jackpot game state is controlled based on the variable display of the low base state or the high base state. The second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5 for one to two frames without any animation or decorative effects, such as a moving display from outside the display area of the image display device 5, and after the display is complete, it is displayed with the decorative effect SE7C, described below. Furthermore, the type of sound output from speakers 8L and 8R during the display period of enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 and the lighting control of game effect lamp 9 are output and lighting controlled based on common control data. Furthermore, when enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 are compared with enlargement effect KE1, which has text as the target image of the enlargement effect, not only are the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect different, but the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ between enlargement effect KE1 and enlargement effect KE13 and KE14 (enlargement effect KE1 > enlargement effect KE13 = enlargement effect KE14).Furthermore, when enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 are compared with enlargement effect KE6, which has text as the target image of the enlargement effect, not only are the length of the display period and the enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect different, but also the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ (enlargement effect KE6 > enlargement effect KE13 = enlargement effect KE14). Furthermore, when comparing enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 with enlargement effect KE8, which uses text as the target image, the display period and the enlargement ratio are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE13 = enlargement effect KE14 > enlargement effect KE8). When comparing enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 with enlargement effect KE9, which uses text as the target image, the display period and the enlargement ratio are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE9 > enlargement effect KE13 = enlargement effect KE14). When comparing enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 with enlargement effect KE10, which uses text as the target image, the display period and the enlargement ratio are different, and the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases are also different (enlargement effect KE13 = enlargement effect KE14 > enlargement effect KE10). Furthermore, when comparing enlargement effects KE13 and KE14 with enlargement effect KE11, which uses text as the target image, not only do the display period and enlargement ratio differ, but the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the rate at which the transparency increases also differ (enlargement effect KE11 > enlargement effect KE13 = enlargement effect KE14). In this way, even within an enlargement effect, the display period, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. differ depending on the scene being displayed, making it possible to effectively highlight the target image using a wide variety of enlargement effects.

Also, as shown in Figure 92 (K), when the variable display result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the fanfare effect is an effect in which an enlargement effect KE13 targeting the jackpot title image BG1 is enlarged vertically and horizontally. When this fanfare effect is executed, the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are hidden, so the enlargement effect KE13 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of these areas during the display period.

(First right-hit display effect, second right-hit display effect)
After the fanfare effect is executed in the "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot B" jackpot game state, the first right-hit display effect is executed. As shown in FIGS. 71(A) to 71(F), the first right-hit display MH1 in this embodiment is first displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. It includes an image of a right-pointing arrow and an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, such as "Hit right!". In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71(B) to 71(D), the first right-hit display MH1 is an image that moves from the front to the back of the display area of the image display device 5 (moving in such a way that it frames in). Upon completion of the moving display, the right-pointing arrow RY1 constituting the first right-hit display MH1 is displayed oscillating. At this time, a decorative effect SE7A in the shape of the right-pointing arrow RY1 is repeatedly displayed, partially overlapping the oscillating display of the right-pointing arrow RY1. Furthermore, after the fanfare effect is executed in the jackpot game state of ``Jackpot C'' or ``Jackpot D'' described below, the first right-hit display effect is executed, in which the displays of Figures 71 (A) to 71 (D) are omitted.

Furthermore, after the vibration display of the right-pointing arrow RY1 that constitutes the first right-hit display MH1 ends, a decorative effect SE7B is displayed targeting the first right-hit display MH1. After the first right-hit display performance ends, an image instructing the player to land the game ball in the second large winning slot is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the first right-hit display presentation, as shown in Figures 103(A) to 103(E), 104(F), and 104(G), a form is exemplified in which a decorative effect SE7B is displayed targeting the first right-hit display MH1. However, this is because, if an enlarged effect were displayed targeting the first right-hit display MH1, as shown in Figures 103(A') to 103(E') and 104(F') to 104(H'), the display range of the enlarged effect would overlap with the first right-hit display MH1, reducing the visibility of the first right-hit display MH1, and because the decorative effect SE7B would be displayed for a longer period of time than if it were displayed, it would be impossible to instruct the preferred player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R.

In this embodiment, during the execution of the first right-hit display effect, the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5 as the second right-hit display effect. This second right-hit display MH2 is configured to begin displaying without the display of a decorative effect like the decorative effect SE7B of the first right-hit display MH1 when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display in the low base state (when the fanfare effect begins). Also, like the first right-hit display MH1, the second right-hit display MH2 is composed of the characters "Right Hit" and a right-pointing arrow RY2. Of these characters "Right Hit" and right-pointing arrow RY2, the character "Right Hit" is displayed as a still image whose display form does not change over time, while the right-pointing arrow YR2 displays a decorative effect SE7C as an animation in which light repeatedly moves to the right over time at a predetermined cycle (3 seconds). Furthermore, the decorative effect SE7C is not only displayed during the execution of the first right-hit display effect, but is also displayed at all times along with the second right-hit display MH2 while the game is controlled to a high base state.

(V Challenge performance, V Challenge success performance)
When the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display of the low base state, that is, when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display of the first special symbol, a V Challenge effect is executed during the jackpot gaming state. Note that, although the V Challenge effect in this embodiment is an effect executed in the fourth round, the present invention is not limited to this, and the C Challenge effect may be executed during any round before the round in which the second large prize opening can be opened.

As shown in Figures 72(A) to 72(C), the V Challenge performance begins by first displaying a gauge G on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5. Then, a message image MG1 (the image in Figure 72(A) displaying "Press the button repeatedly to collect gauge G!") is displayed in the center of the display area, encouraging the player to update the gauge G by operating the push button 31B. Next, an enlargement effect KE15 is displayed targeting the message image MG1. Note that when comparing enlargement effect KE15 with enlargement effects KE1, KE6, KE8, KE9, KE10, KE11, KE13, and KE14, which target text images, the display duration and enlargement ratio of the enlargement effect differ, as do the speeds at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the transparency increases. Thus, because the display duration, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc., of the enlargement effect vary depending on the scene being displayed, a wide variety of enlargement effects can be used to effectively highlight the target image.

When the display of the enlargement effect KE15 targeting the message image MG1 ends, as shown in Figures 72(D) to 72(H) and 73(I), an operation prompting image SS3 (an image of the push button 31B) prompting the player to operate the push button 31B begins to be displayed in place of the message image MG1. Thereafter, during the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B, an updated display of the gauge G (a display in which the gauge G fills up from bottom to top) is executed in accordance with the player's predetermined number of operations of the push button 31B and the passage of time. In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 72(D) to 72(F), an operation prompting image SS3 prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a light-emitting effect targeting the operation prompting image SS3 are displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. More specifically, in the V Challenge effect, the light-emitting effect is first displayed, and the operation prompting image SS3 begins to be displayed while the light-emitting effect is being displayed. In other words, this is executed in the same display pattern as when the operation prompting image SS2 is displayed in the decide button effect. Furthermore, when the operation prompt image SS3 is displayed, the type of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 are controlled based on the same control data as when the operation prompt image SS2 is displayed in the deciding button effect.

If the jackpot game currently being played is a jackpot B jackpot game, as shown in Figures 73(I) to 73(L), the gauge G will ultimately be displayed in its final state (a state in which the gauge G is filled to the top (full)), and the V Challenge success effect will be executed. As the V Challenge effect, the enlargement effect KH16 and decorative effect SE8 are simultaneously displayed on the gauge G that has changed to its final state, and then a message indicating that control to open the second large prize opening will be executed (the "Challenge Successful!!" display shown in Figure 73(K)) will be displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game currently being played is a jackpot game of jackpot A, as shown in Figures 73(J') to 73(L'), the gauge G will not ultimately be displayed in its final state, and a message will be displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 indicating that the opening control of the second large prize opening has not been executed (the message "Failed..." shown in Figure 73(L')).

As shown in Figure 92 (L), when the variable display result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the fanfare effect is an effect in which an enlargement effect KE13 targeting the jackpot title image BG1 is enlarged vertically and horizontally. When this fanfare effect is executed, the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are hidden, so the enlargement effect KE13 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of these areas during the display period.

Also, as shown in Figure 92 (L), the V Challenge suggestion effect is an effect in which an enlargement effect targeting the message image MG1 is enlarged vertically and horizontally. When the V Challenge suggestion effect is being executed, the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are hidden, and therefore the enlargement effect KE15 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of these special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S during the display period. Also, when the V Challenge suggestion effect is being executed, the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and the enlargement effect KE15 is also an enlargement effect that does not overlap with the second right-hit display MH2 during the enlargement display process.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 93 (M), the V Challenge notification effect is an effect in which a decorative effect SE8 is displayed targeting the gauge G, and an enlargement effect KE16 is enlarged vertically and horizontally targeting the gauge G. When the V Challenge notification effect is being executed, the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are hidden, so the enlargement effect KE16 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of these special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S during the display period. Also, when the V Challenge notification effect is being executed, the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and the enlargement effect KE16 is also an enlargement effect that does not overlap with the second right-hit display MH2 during the enlargement display process.

(V winning performance)
After the V Challenge Success effect is executed during a jackpot game, the V Entry effect is executed when the game ball enters the second large prize entry slot in the sixth round of the jackpot game, i.e., when a V Entry occurs. First, when the V Challenge Success effect described above ends, in the fifth round of the jackpot game, the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the second large prize entry slot will be opened in the sixth round (the message "Aim for V in the next round!" shown in FIG. 74(A)). Next, when the sixth round of the jackpot game begins, the image display device 5 first displays a message urging the game ball to be shot toward the second large prize entry slot for which opening control is being executed (the message "Aim for V!" shown in FIG. 74(B)). In this state, when the game ball enters the second large prize entry slot during the sixth round, the image display device 5 displays the letter "V" V1 in response to the game ball entering the second large prize entry slot. Specifically, as shown in Figures 74(C) to 74(G), first, the letter "V" V1 starts to be displayed large across the entire display area of the image display device 5, and is gradually reduced in size toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, when the letter "V" V1 is reduced in size to a certain size, an enlargement effect KE17 is displayed with the letter "V" V1 as the target.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 93 (N), the V winning effect is an effect in which the enlargement effect KE17 is enlarged vertically and horizontally around the letter "V" V1. When the V winning effect is being executed, the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are hidden, so the enlargement effect KE17 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of these special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, or display area 5S during the display period. Also, when the V winning effect is being executed, the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and the enlargement effect KE17 is also an enlargement effect that does not overlap with the second right-hit display MH2 during the enlargement display process.

(Ending performance)
When a jackpot occurs in a low base state or a high base state and the controlled jackpot game ends, an ending effect is executed during the operation period of the jackpot end display timer. For the ending effect, as shown in Figures 75(A) to 75(F), a game status notification image YH1 indicating the controlled game status, such as the text "BATTLE RUSH ENTERED!!," is displayed on the image display device 5. Specifically, as shown in Figures 75(B) to 75(E), the game status notification image YH1, such as "BATTLE RUSH ENTERED!!," begins large across the entire display area of the image display device 5 and gradually shrinks toward the center of the image display device 5. When the game status notification image YH1 is reduced to a certain size, an enlargement effect KE18 is displayed on the game status notification image YH1. After the ending performance is completed, the image display device 5 displays a variable display of a decorative symbol based on the variable display of the second special symbol while displaying a background image corresponding to the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state. In this embodiment, the game status notification image YH1 is displayed on the image display device 5 upon completion of a jackpot game of "jackpot A,""jackpotB,""jackpotC," or "jackpot D," which will be described later. However, this is not limited to this. When a jackpot game of "jackpot B,""jackpotC," or "jackpot D" is completed, the text "BATTLE RUSH ENTERED!!" and an enlarged effect KE18 may be displayed, and when a jackpot game of "jackpot A" is completed, the text "CHANCE TIME ENTERED!!" and a decorative effect may be displayed.

As shown in Figure 94 (O), the ending effect is an effect in which the enlargement effect KE18 is enlarged vertically and horizontally on the game status notification image YH1. When this ending effect is being executed, the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F, and display area 5S are hidden, so the enlargement effect KE18 is an enlargement effect that does not overlap with any of these during the display period. Also, when the ending effect is being executed, the second right-hit display MH2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and the enlargement effect KE18 is also an enlargement effect that does not overlap with the second right-hit display MH2 during the enlargement display process.

(First left-handed hit display effect)
When the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this embodiment) in the high base state without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the first left-hit display effect is executed. First, as shown in Figures 76(A) to 76(F), when the variable display is executed a specific number of times in the high base state without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, during the specific number of variable displays, a message is displayed indicating that the high base state will end and the game will be controlled to the low base state after the variable display ends (the "BATTLE RUSH END" display shown in Figure 76(B)). At this time, no enlargement effect is displayed for the "BATTLE RUSH END" display. This allows the player to be properly notified that the high base state is ending without upsetting them, and further, it allows for a contrast with the "BATTLE RUSH ENTERS!!" display in the ending effect. Then, when the game state is controlled to the low base state, a variable display (one to four variable displays of the second special pattern) is executed based on the reserved memory of the second special pattern that was stored at the time when the game state was controlled to the low base state.

In this embodiment, the first left-hit display effect is executed during the variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable display of the second special symbols in these low base states. As shown in Figures 76(D) to 76(F), the first left-hit display effect is a first left-hit display LH1 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game region 2L, which is displayed in the center of the display region of the image display device 5 over one to two frames without any animation or effects such as a moving display from outside the display region of the image display device 5. The first left-hit display LH1 is composed of a left-pointing arrow LY1 and the display of "left-hit" within the left-pointing arrow.

The left-pointing arrow LY1 is displayed as an animation that repeatedly moves toward the left of the image display device 5. Although not shown, a decorative effect is displayed on the surface of the "left hit" display within the left-pointing arrow, in the form of an animation in which light repeatedly moves from the "left" part of "left hit" to the "chi" part over time. Furthermore, during the display period of the first left-pointing display LH1, a decorative effect SE9 in the shape of the left-pointing arrow LY1 is repeatedly displayed, overlapping with the movement of the left-pointing arrow LY1, thereby clearly informing the player that the game state has been controlled to a low base state, i.e., that the game ball is being launched toward the left game area 2L. The first left-pointing display effect is executed for a predetermined period (8 seconds) provided that the game state has been controlled from a high base state to a low base state. Therefore, even if, for example, one variable display in which the first left-pointing display effect is being executed ends and the next variable display begins, the effect will not end until the predetermined period has elapsed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the first left-hit display effect is executed during the variable display of a decorative symbol based on the variable display of a second special symbol in a low base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the gaming state is controlled from a high base state to a low base state, if the second special symbol is not reserved and stored at the time the gaming state is controlled to the low base state, the first left-hit display effect is executed even in a situation in which the variable display of the first special symbol or a decorative symbol based on the variable display of the second special symbol is not being performed. In this case, a background display corresponding to the low base state is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first left-hit display effect is executed with the decorative symbol stopped on the background display. At this time, the first left-hit display effect is not interrupted even if the variable display begins.

(Second left-handed hit display effect)
In the low base state, even after the first left-hit display effect, a second left-hit display effect can be executed, instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L. For example, as shown in Figures 77(A) to 77(D), if the player shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R in the low base state, when the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, a second left-hit display LH2 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L is displayed in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 over one to two frames without any animation or effects such as a movement display from outside the display area of the image display device 5. The second left-hit display LH2 is composed of a left-pointing arrow LY2 and the display of "left-hit" within the left-pointing arrow.

The left-pointing arrow LY2 is displayed as an animation that repeatedly moves toward the left of the image display device 5. Although not shown, a decorative effect is displayed on the surface of the "left hit" display within the left-pointing arrow as an animation in which light repeatedly moves from the "left" part of "left hit" to the "chi" part over time. Furthermore, during the display period of the second left-pointing display LH2, a decorative effect SE10 in the shape of the left-pointing arrow LY2 is repeatedly displayed, overlapping with the movement of the left-pointing arrow LY2, thereby more clearly instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L. In other words, the display in the second left-pointing display presentation has the same display pattern as the display in the first left-pointing display presentation, except for the display position and display size in the display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the second left-hit display effect is exemplified by displaying an arrow (left-pointing arrow LY2) that is smaller than the arrow (left-pointing arrow LY1) displayed as the first left-hit display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and arrows of the same size may be displayed for the first left-hit display effect and the second left-hit display effect. Furthermore, in a low base state, the second left-hit display effect may be executed until the gate switch 21 detects a predetermined number (five) of game balls shot by the player toward the right game area 2R. When the gate switch 21 detects that more than the predetermined number of game balls have been shot, the second left-hit display effect may be interrupted and the first left-hit display effect may be executed.

(First prize ball count announcement)
In the jackpot game state or high base state, a first prize ball count notification effect can be executed, which updates the total number of prize balls (first prize ball count) in response to the entry of a game ball into a jackpot entry slot during jackpot game. As shown in Figures 78(A) to 78(E), the first prize ball count notification effect updates the value of the first prize ball count displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., the upper left) of the display area of the image display device 5 each time a game ball enters a jackpot entry slot (each time the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot entry slot designation command) during jackpot game states "Jackpot A" through "Jackpot D," as described below. At this time, a decorative effect SE11 is displayed for the digit whose value is being updated. These decorative effects SE11 are displayed overlapping the digit whose value is being updated, and the updated value becomes visible to the player when the decorative effect SE11 display ends.

(Second prize ball announcement)
Furthermore, during a jackpot game, if the total number of prize balls (first prize ball count) corresponding to the entry of game balls into the jackpot slot during a jackpot game of "Jackpot C" or "Jackpot D" (described later) reaches a specific value (e.g., "10,000" in the examples shown in FIGS. 78(F) and 78(G)), a second prize ball notification effect can be executed. As shown in FIGS. 78(F) and 78(G), when the first prize ball count reaches a specific value, the image display device 5 displays a specific value arrival image TO1 indicating that the specific value has been reached. At this time, multiple decorative effects SE12 are displayed around the specific value arrival image TO1 to decorate the specific value arrival image TO1. By displaying these decorative effects SE12 together with the specific value arrival image TO1, it is possible to clearly appeal to the player that the number of prize balls paid out has reached a specific number.

(Hold consecutive suggestion effect / Hold consecutive notification effect)
In a jackpot game state based on the variable display in a high base state, that is, a jackpot game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute a hold sequence suggestion effect which suggests that there is a hold memory in the second special symbol hold memory where the variable display result will be a jackpot, in other words, a hold sequence suggestion effect which suggests that a situation is present where a hold sequence will occur that will control the jackpot game state again without generating a new starting winning, and a hold sequence notification effect which notifies that there is a hold memory in the second special symbol hold memory where the variable display result will be a jackpot.

As shown in Figures 79(A) to 79(F) and 80(A) to 80(F), the hold consecutive suggestion performance involves first displaying a message image MG2 (the image displaying "GET V!" shown in Figure 79(B)) in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, suggesting that a hold consecutive will occur. Next, in place of the message image MG2, an operation prompt image SS4 (an image of the push button 31B) is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Thereafter, when the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B begins, a decorative effect SE13 targeting the operation prompt image SS4 is displayed behind the operation prompt image SS4. Note that in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 79(C) to 79(E) and 80(C) to 80(E), an operation prompt image SS4 prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a light-emitting effect targeting the operation prompt image SS4 are displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. More specifically, in the hold consecutive suggestion effect, the display of a light-emitting effect begins first, and while the light-emitting effect is being displayed, the display of the operation prompt image SS4 begins. That is, this is executed using the same display pattern as when the operation prompt image SS2 is displayed in the decide button effect. Furthermore, when the operation prompt image SS4 is displayed, the type of sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R and the lighting control of the game effect lamp 9 are controlled based on the same control data as when the operation prompt image SS2 is displayed in the decide button effect. Furthermore, although not shown, during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as an animation that repeatedly switches between a first display in which the push button 31B protrudes and a second display in which the push button 31B is recessed. At this time, a light-emitting effect, a type of decorative effect that emits light at a first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that protrudes in the first display, and a light-emitting effect, a type of decorative effect that emits light at a second brightness higher than the first brightness, is displayed on the surface of the image of the push button 31B that recesses in the second display. The animation of this operation prompt image SS4 is the same as the animation of the operation prompt images for the first line preview effect, second line preview effect, cut-in effect, and final button effect.

If the second special symbol reserved memory contains a reserved memory whose variable display result is a jackpot, a consecutive reserved symbol notification effect is executed in response to the player's operation of push button 31B or the expiration of the operation acceptance period for push button 31B. As a consecutive reserved symbol notification effect, the letter "V" V2 is displayed in response to the presence of a reserved memory whose variable display result is a jackpot in the second special symbol reserved memory. Specifically, as shown in Figures 79(G) to 79(J), the letter "V" V2 first begins to be displayed large across the entire display area of the image display device 5, and then gradually shrinks toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, when the letter "V" V2 is displayed in a reduced size to a certain size, an enlargement effect KE19 is displayed targeting the letter "V" V2. Furthermore, when comparing enlargement effect KE19 with enlargement effects KE1, KE6, KE8, KE9, KE10, KE11, KE13, KE14, KE15, KE17, and KE18, which use text as the target image, not only are the display period and enlargement rate of the enlargement effect different, but the speed at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the speed at which the transparency increases also differ. In this way, the display period, enlargement speed, transparency speed, etc. vary depending on the scene being displayed, allowing for a wide variety of enlargement effects to effectively highlight the target image.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory in the second special symbol reserved memory that results in a jackpot when the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Figures 80 (G) and 80 (H), the brightness of the entire display area of the image display device 5 will temporarily decrease in response to the player operating the push button 31B or the expiration of the period for accepting operations on the push button 31B, and it will be announced that there is no reserved memory in the second special symbol reserved memory that results in a jackpot when the variable display result is a jackpot. After this, the display area of the image display device 5 will return to its original state and jackpot play will continue.

In addition, in the hold consecutive notification performance of this embodiment, if there is a hold memory in the second special symbol hold memory where the variable display result is a jackpot, the letter "V" V2 is displayed in the same manner regardless of the number of hold memories in the second special symbol hold memory where the variable display result is a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display manner of the letter "V" V2 may be changed depending on the number of hold memories in the second special symbol hold memory where the variable display result is a jackpot.

(Demo performance)
In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, various effects can be executed during variable display in the jackpot game state, low base state, and high base state, but when no game is being played, a demo movie can be displayed as a demo effect on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 81(A) and 81(B), when the conditions for starting the demo movie display (demonstration effect) are met, the display of Scene 1 begins. Note that, as described below, depending on the start conditions, a switching display may be displayed before Scene 1 begins. In Scene 1, a company name background display 003SG301 consisting of white text is displayed, and a company name display 003SG302 consisting primarily of a blue company slogan display 003SG302A and a company logo display 003SG302B is displayed in a "small" size in the center of the screen. It then gradually expands and fades in while gradually decreasing its transmittance (transparency), giving the appearance of the company name display 003SG302 moving from the back of the display screen to the front. The display area 5S in the upper left corner of the display screen maintains the number of reserved memories and small symbols. In this way, even when the decorative symbols are not displayed, the small symbols remain visible, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

In addition, in the first scene, the light emission mode (e.g., on, flashing, off, color, brightness, etc.) of the game effect lamp 9 changes in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 003SG302. For example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 may increase or the color may change as the transmittance of the company name display 003SG302 decreases.

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 1" part of the second scene begins to display, the ally characters 003SG500A-003SG500D that appear in various effects and the text displays 003SG501A-003SG501D indicating each character's name are faded in sequentially (animated display), while decorative effects SE21 corresponding to these ally characters 003SG500A-003SG500D are displayed in the background (see Figures 81 (C)-(F)). Note that during the "Machine Introduction 1" part, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that is not linked to the text (text displays 003SG501A-003SG501D) displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-1" part of the second scene begins to be displayed, an animation of the enemy character 003SG510A that appears in various effects is displayed, and a fade-in (animated) text display 003SG511A reads, "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" (See Figures 81(G) and (H)). Next, when the "Model Introduction 3-1" part begins to be displayed, a background display 003SG503 showing the city and an ally character 003SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in is displayed showing the ally character flying through the city and rushing to the scene (See Figure 81(I)).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-2" part of the second scene begins to be displayed again, ally character 003SG500A, enemy character 003SG510A, and text display 003SG511B reading "Protect the town from the enemy!" are faded in (animated) (see Figures 81(J) and (K)). After that, when "Model Introduction 3-2" begins to be displayed, ally character 003SG500A is enlarged, and a cut-in and a decorative effect SE21, which is the same effect as the effect displayed in Figures 81(C) to 81(F), are displayed as an effect corresponding to the cut-in (see Figure 81(L)).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-3" part of the second scene begins to be displayed again, an image of ally character 003SG500A and enemy character 003SG510A fighting, along with the text display 003SG511C saying "Don't lose!" fades in (animated) (see Figures 82 (M)-(N)). After that, all ally characters 003SG500A-003SG500D and the text display 003SG511D saying "All together!" fade in (animated) (see Figure 82 (O)).

Note that while the animation displays of ally characters 003SG500A-003SG500D and enemy character 003SG510A in the second scene involve the ally characters expanding and contracting and fighting, the various text displays 003SG501A-003SG501D and 003SG511A-003SG511D are animated with less change in visibility than the animated displays involving movement like the ally characters 003SG500A-003SG500D, for example by fading in at the start of the display.

Also, in the second scene, the game effect lamp 9 flashes green when "Machine Introduction 3-1" or "Machine Introduction 3-2" is displayed, but it basically lights up in a white wave pattern, and its lighting pattern (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or never) changes in conjunction with the animation display (fade-in display) of the various text displays 003SG501A-003SG501D, 003SG511A-003SG511D. Basically, its lighting pattern (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes in conjunction with dynamic animation displays of friendly characters 003SG500A-003SG500D and enemy character 003SG510A running, jumping, punching, etc. In other words, in the second scene, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that is not linked to the animation display of the text.

Next, when the display of the third scene begins, a decorative effect SE21 is displayed in the background, and the model main title name display 003SG520A, consisting of the words "FEVER POWER" and a cloud-shaped background, is displayed in "small" size in the center of the display screen (default display position), and then gradually expands and fades in (animated) while decreasing its transmittance (transparency), giving the appearance that the model main title name display 003SG520A is moving from the back to the front of the display screen (see Figures 82 (P) to (R)). At this time, multiple roughly cross-shaped decorative effects SE22 are displayed around the model main title name display 003SG520A.

Next, a c consisting of the letter "II" is displayed to the right of the model main title name display 003SG520A (the specified display position), and then fades in while shrinking slightly and decreasing its transmittance (transparency) (see Figures 82 (S)-(T)). At the completion of the fade-in display of the model subtitle name display 003SG520B, an enlargement effect KE21 is displayed targeting the model main title name display 003SG520A and the model subtitle name display 003SG520B. When comparing enlargement effect KE21 with enlargement effects KE1, KE6, KE8, KE9, KE10, KE11, KE13, KE14, KE15, KE17, KE18, and KE19, which target text images, the length of the display period and the enlargement rate of the enlargement effect differ, as do the speeds at which the enlargement effect itself expands and the rate at which the transmittance increases. In this way, the display period, enlargement speed, and transparency speed of the enlargement effect vary depending on the scene being displayed, allowing for a wide variety of enlargement effects to effectively highlight the target image.

Furthermore, the model subtitle name display 003SG520C, which consists of the characters "Everyone Gathers Ver.", is displayed in the center (default display position) in front of the model main title name display 003SG520A, and then moves slightly smaller and is displayed below "FEVER POWER" (default display position) (see Figures 82 (U) to (V)).

Furthermore, upon completion of the moving display of the model subtitle name display 003SG520C, the model main title name display 003SG520A, model subtitle name display 003SG520B, and model subtitle name display 003SG520C are displayed together in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, multiple roughly cross-shaped decorative effects SE22 are displayed around the model main title name display 003SG520A, model subtitle name display 003SG520B, and model subtitle name display 003SG520C, targeting these display types.

In addition, in the third scene, the game effect lamp 9 basically lights up in a rainbow wave pattern, and its lighting pattern changes in conjunction with the animated display of the model subtitle name displays 003SG520C, 003SG520C. In particular, in the "model subtitle name" part, the game effect lamp 9 flashes when the model subtitle name displays 003SG520C, 003SG520C move and are displayed in the specified display position. In other words, in the second scene, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that is not linked to the animated display of the characters.

Next, when the "Warning 1" part of the fourth scene begins to be displayed, a dark green warning background display 003SG311 is displayed, and the anti-addiction display 003SG312 is faded in (animated) in the center of the screen (see Figure 82 (W)). Next, when the "Warning 2" part begins to be displayed, the display switches to a black warning background display 003SG321, and the accident prevention display 003SG322 is displayed (see Figure 82 (X)). Note that no decorative or enlargement effects are displayed for the anti-addiction display 003SG312 and the accident prevention display 003SG322.

The game effect lamp 9 will not flash white in conjunction with the fade-in display of the addiction prevention display 003SG312 during the "Warning 1" and "Warning 2" parts, and will continue to light up in a white wave pattern during the fourth scene.

Furthermore, in the fourth scene, the game effect lamp 9 does not change its light emission mode (e.g., on, flashing, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the addiction prevention display 003SG312, preventing the addiction prevention display 003SG312 from being displayed more prominently than the company name display 003SG302, model main title name display 003SG520A, and model subtitle name displays 003SG520C, 003SG520C. In other words, in the second scene, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that is not linked to the animated display of characters.

As shown in Figure 87 (A), the demonstration effect in this embodiment is an effect in which the model main title name display 003SG520A and the enlargement effect KE21 targeting the model main title name display 003SG520A are enlarged and displayed so as to diffuse from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 outward from the display area. During the enlargement process, the enlargement effect KE21 in the demonstration effect is displayed overlapping the display area 5S in the upper left corner of the display area of the image display device 5. As described above, there are two types of decorative effects displayed during the demonstration effect: decorative effect SE21 and decorative effect SE22, and there is only one type of enlargement effect displayed during the demonstration effect: enlargement effect KE21.

(Effects for each production)
As described above, in this embodiment, the enlargement effect in each effect is displayed as an image imitating a different image, as shown in Figures 85 and 86. That is, the enlargement effects in this embodiment are all images with different shapes for each effect. The enlargement effect is also an image with a higher transparency than the target image. As shown in Figure 99, in this embodiment, the enlargement effect is an image that, with some exceptions, is a different shape from the target image and does not change in size over time. The decorative effect is also an image with the same transparency as the target image.

(Timing chart for each performance)
Next, the enlarged decorative pattern effect at the start of the variable display, the first line preview effect, the second line preview effect, the pseudo consecutive effect, the normal reach effect, the strong super reach title effect, the pattern matching effect, the preview button effect, and the deciding button effect will be explained based on the timing charts shown in Figures 109 to 121.

(Decorative pattern enlargement effect when variable display starts)
109, 118, and 121, in the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect, the decorative pattern is changed from its normal size of "medium" to a larger "large" state over a period A1 from the start of the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect, which is the start timing of the variable display, to the end of the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect, and then the decorative pattern is maintained in the "large" state for a predetermined period, after which the decorative pattern is reduced again from the "large" state to the "medium" state. In other words, the period A1 from the start timing to the end timing of the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect is the enlarged display period of the decorative pattern in the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect.

Furthermore, while the decorative pattern is maintained in the "large" state during period A1, the image display device 5 displays a decorative effect targeting the decorative pattern over period A2. Furthermore, from the timing at which the decorative effect starts to be displayed, speakers 8L and 8R play a decorative effect-compatible sound corresponding to the decorative effect over period A3. In other words, period A2 is the display period for the decorative effect in the decorative pattern enlargement performance at the start of variable display, and period A3 is the output period for the decorative effect-compatible sound in the decorative pattern enlargement performance at the start of variable display.

Here, in the decorative pattern enlargement effect at the start of variable display in this embodiment, period A1 is set to be longer than periods A2 and A3, and period A2 is set to be longer than period A3 (A1 > A2, A1 > A3, A2 > A3). In other words, in the decorative pattern enlargement effect at the start of variable display, the display of a decorative effect targeted at the decorative pattern and the output of a decorative effect-related sound begin during the enlarged display period of the decorative pattern, and the display of a decorative effect targeted at the decorative pattern and the output of a decorative effect-related sound end during the enlarged display period of the decorative pattern. Furthermore, while the display of a decorative effect targeted at the decorative pattern and the output of a decorative effect-related sound are executed at the same time, the output of the decorative effect-related sound ends earlier than the display of the decorative effect.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period A2 from period A1 is set to a period longer than period A2. In other words, in the decorative pattern enlargement effect at the start of variable display, the period during which the decorative pattern and decorative effect are displayed overlapping is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect.

In this embodiment, the decorative pattern enlargement effect at the start of variable display is set so that the period during which the decorative pattern and decorative effect are displayed overlapping is longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern enlargement effect at the start of variable display may be set so that the period during which the decorative pattern and decorative effect are displayed overlapping is shorter than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the effect background corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 over a period A41 from the start of the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect to the start of the decorative effect display and the output of the decorative effect-related sound, and then, over a period A42 until the end of the decorative effect display, is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the first effect display corresponding to the decorative effect (first effect) in the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect. Then, over a period A43 until the end of the variable display start decorative pattern enlargement effect, light emission control is again performed based on the light emission control data for the effect background.

(First line preview)
110, 118, and 121, in the first dialogue preview performance, a first dialogue image according to the performance pattern of the first dialogue preview performance is displayed over a period B1 from the start timing of the first dialogue preview performance to the end timing of the first dialogue preview performance. In other words, the period B1 from the start timing of the first dialogue preview performance to the end timing of the first dialogue preview performance is the display period of the first dialogue image in the first dialogue preview performance. Note that the first dialogue image in this embodiment is an image that is displayed and moves from the top end to the center of the image display device 5 from the start timing of the first dialogue preview performance.

From the time the movement of the first dialogue image is completed, an enlargement effect is displayed for the first dialogue image over period B2, a first dialogue-related sound corresponding to the first dialogue image is output over period B3, and an enlargement effect-related sound is output over period B4. In other words, period B2 is the display period for the enlargement effect in the first dialogue preview performance, period B3 is the output period for the first dialogue-related sound in the first dialogue preview performance, and period B4 is the output period for the enlargement effect-related sound in the first dialogue preview performance.

Here, in the first line preview performance in this embodiment, period B1 is set to be longer than periods B2, B3, and B4, and period B3 is set to be longer than periods B2 and B4 (B1>B2, B1>B3, B1>B4, B3>B2, B3>B4).

In other words, in the first line preview performance, the display of the enlargement effect and the output of the first line corresponding sound and the enlargement effect corresponding sound begin from the moment the movement of the first line image is completed. Of these, the display of the enlargement effect ends first, and the output of the first line corresponding sound ends last.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period B2 from period B1 is set to a period longer than period B2. In other words, in the first dialogue preview performance, the period during which the first dialogue image and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping each other is set to be longer than the period during which the first dialogue image is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect.

In this embodiment, the period during which the first dialogue image and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping each other is set to be longer than the period during which the first dialogue image is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect in the first dialogue preview performance; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the first dialogue image and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping each other may be set to be shorter than the period during which the first dialogue image is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect in the first dialogue preview performance.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the effect background corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 over the period B51 from the start of the first line preview effect to the completion of the movement of the first line image, and then, over the period B52, which is the same period as the display period of the enlargement effect (period B2), it is controlled to emit light based on the enlargement effect display light emission control data A corresponding to the enlargement effect for the first line preview effect. Then, over the period B53 until the end of the first line preview effect, it is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the first line preview effect corresponding to the first line preview effect after the enlargement effect display has ended.

(Second line preview)
111, 118, and 121, in the second line preview performance, a character image is moved from the left end to the center of the image display device 5 over a predetermined period from the start of the second line preview performance. Then, from the completion of the character image movement display, a second line image according to the performance pattern of the second line preview performance is displayed over a period C1 until the end of the second line preview performance. In other words, the period C1 from the completion of the character image movement to the end of the second line preview performance is the display period for the line image in the second line preview performance.

Furthermore, from the timing when the character image completes its movement, a decorative effect is displayed for the second dialogue image over a period C2, and a decorative effect-compatible sound and a second dialogue-compatible sound corresponding to the first dialogue image are output over a period C3. In other words, period C2 is the display period for the decorative effect in the second dialogue preview performance, and period C3 is the output period for the decorative effect-compatible sound and second dialogue-compatible sound in the second dialogue preview performance.

Here, in the second line preview performance in this embodiment, period C1 is set to be longer than periods C2 and C3, and period C2 is set to be longer than period C3 (C1>C2, C1>C3, C2>C3).

In other words, in the second dialogue preview performance, the display of the decorative effect and the output of the decorative effect-compatible sound and second dialogue-compatible sound begin simultaneously with the start of display of the second dialogue image, and during the display period of the second dialogue image, the output of the decorative effect-compatible sound and second dialogue-compatible sound ends before the display of the decorative effect.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the effect background corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 over the period C41 from the start of the second line preview effect to the completion of the character image movement. Furthermore, in the period C42 from the completion of the character image movement to just before the output of the decorative effect corresponding sound and the B second line corresponding sound ends, light emission is controlled based on the light emission control data A for displaying the second effect corresponding to the decorative effect (second effect) targeted at the second line image. Then, thereafter, in the period C43 until the end of the second line preview effect, light emission is controlled based on the light emission control data for the effect background corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

(Pseudo consecutive effects)
112, 119, and 121, in the pseudo consecutive display, pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C for a period D1 from the start of the pseudo consecutive display to the end of the pseudo consecutive display. More specifically, for a certain period from the start of the pseudo consecutive display, the image display device 5 executes a slow variable display of the pseudo consecutive symbols (variable display at a slower speed than the variable display of normal decorative symbols), suggesting to the player that the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop. Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, a pseudo consecutive symbol enlargement display period is performed from the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols, in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are changed from the normal size of "medium" to a larger size of "large", after which the pseudo consecutive symbols are maintained in the "large" state for a predetermined period, and then the pseudo consecutive symbols are reduced again from the "large" state to the "medium" state during a pseudo consecutive symbol reduction display period. From then on, the size of the pseudo consecutive symbols is maintained at "medium" until the pseudo consecutive performance ends.

In other words, the period D1 from the start to the end of the pseudo consecutive performance is the display period of the pseudo consecutive symbols in the pseudo consecutive performance.

In addition, a decorative effect targeting the pseudo-continuous symbols is displayed over a period D2 from the variable display speed slow period until the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. Furthermore, an enlarged effect targeting the pseudo-continuous symbols is displayed during a period D3 from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols to the timing immediately after the end of the enlarged pseudo-continuous symbol display period, and during a period D4 from the start of the reduced pseudo-continuous symbol display period to the timing immediately after the end of the reduced pseudo-continuous symbol display period.

Then, a decorative effect-compatible sound is output over period D5, which is the same period as period D2, and an enlargement effect-compatible sound is output over period D6 from the timing when the enlarged pseudo-continuous symbol display begins and period D7 from the timing when the reduced pseudo-continuous symbol display begins. In other words, period D2 is the display period for the decorative effect in the pseudo-continuous performance, periods D3 and D4 are the display periods for the enlargement effect in the pseudo-continuous performance, period D5 is the output period for the decorative effect-compatible sound in the pseudo-continuous performance, and periods D6 and D7 are the output periods for the enlargement effect-compatible sound.

In this embodiment of the pseudo consecutive effects, period D1 is set to be longer than periods D2 to D7, and periods D2 and D5, periods D3 and D4, and periods 6 and D7 are all set to the same length. Period D6 is set to be longer than period D3, and period D7 is set to be longer than period D4 (D1 > D2, D1 > D3, D1 > D4, D1 > CD, D1 > C6, D1 > CD7, D3 = D4, D6 = D7, D6 > D3, D7 > D4).

In other words, in pseudo-consecutive performances, the display of the decorative effect and the output of the decorative effect-compatible sound begin at the same time, and the display of the decorative effect and the output of the decorative effect-compatible sound end at the same time. Also, while the display of the enlargement effect corresponding to the enlarged display of the pseudo-consecutive patterns and the output of the enlargement effect-compatible sound begin at the same time, the display of the enlargement effect corresponding to the enlarged display of the pseudo-consecutive patterns ends earlier than the output of the enlargement effect-compatible sound. And while the display of the enlargement effect corresponding to the reduced display of the pseudo-consecutive patterns and the output of the enlargement effect-compatible sound begin at the same time, the display of the enlargement effect corresponding to the reduced display of the pseudo-consecutive patterns ends earlier than the output of the enlargement effect-compatible sound.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period D2 from period D1 is set to be longer than period D2, the period obtained by subtracting period D3 from period D1 is set to be longer than period D3, and the period obtained by subtracting period D4 from period D1 is set to be longer than period D4. In other words, in the pseudo-consecutive performance, the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns and decorative effects are displayed overlapping each other is set to be longer than the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed without overlapping with the decorative effects, and the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns and enlargement effects are displayed overlapping each other is set to be longer than the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed without overlapping with the enlargement effects.

Furthermore, period D2 is set to be longer than periods D3 and D4. In other words, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when enlarged, or the period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when reduced.

In this embodiment, the period during which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed overlapping with the decorative effect is set longer than the period during which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when enlarged, or the period during which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when reduced; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed overlapping with the decorative effect may be set shorter than the period during which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when enlarged, or the period during which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when reduced.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light-emitting background control data corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 over the period D81 from the start of the pseudo-continuous display to the start of the decorative effect display. During the period D82 from the start of the decorative effect display to the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the light-emitting lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light-emitting control data for pseudo-continuous symbol temporary stop promotion, which encourages the player to expect the pseudo-continuous symbols to temporarily stop. During the period D83 from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol to the end of the reduced pseudo-continuous symbol display, the light-emitting lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light-emitting control data for pseudo-continuous symbol temporary stop success, which corresponds to the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols. During the period D84 from the end of the reduced pseudo-continuous symbol display to the end of the pseudo-continuous display, the light-emitting lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light-emitting background control data corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

(Normal reach effect)
113, 119, and 121, in the normal reach presentation, the left and right decorative patterns are enlarged and reduced over a period E1 from the start of the normal reach presentation (the time when the decorative patterns (left and right decorative patterns) stop in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R) to the end of the normal reach presentation (the time when the decorative patterns (left and right decorative patterns) stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R start to move left and right in the display area of the image display device 5). More specifically, after a decorative pattern enlargement display period from the start of the normal reach presentation in which the stopped left and right decorative patterns are changed from a normal size "medium" state to a "large" state larger than the "medium" size, the left and right decorative patterns are maintained in the "large" state for a predetermined period, and then the left and right decorative patterns are again reduced from the "large" state to the "medium" state during a decorative pattern reduction display period. From then on, the size of the decorative patterns on the left and right will remain "medium" until the normal reach performance ends.

In other words, the period E1 from the start of the normal reach effect to the end of the normal reach effect is the display period for the left and right decorative symbols in the normal reach effect, and the period E11 from the start of the normal reach effect to the end of the reduced display period for the left and right decorative symbols is the enlarged display period for the left and right decorative symbols in the normal reach effect.

In addition, an expansion effect is displayed for the left and right decorative symbols over period E2, from the start of the normal reach performance to a specific timing within period E11, and an expansion effect corresponding sound is output over period E3, from the start of the normal reach performance to the start of the reduced display period for the left and right decorative symbols. In other words, period E2 is the display period for the expansion effect for the left and right decorative symbols in the normal reach performance, and period E3 is the output period for the expansion effect corresponding sound in the normal reach performance.

Here, in the normal reach effects of this embodiment, period E1 is set to be longer than periods E11, E2, and E3, and period E11 is set to be longer than periods E2 and E3. Furthermore, period E3 is set to be longer than period E2 (E1 > E11, E1 > E2, E1 > E3, E11 > E2, E11 > E3, E3 > E2).

In other words, in a normal reach performance, the enlargement effect and sound corresponding to the enlargement effect begin as the left and right decorative symbols begin to enlarge, but of these, the enlargement effect ends first, and the enlargement of the decorative symbols ends last.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period E2 from period E1 is set to be longer than period E2. In other words, in normal reach presentations, the period during which the decorative symbols and the expansion effect are displayed overlapping is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative symbols are displayed without overlapping with the expansion effect.

In this embodiment, in the normal reach presentation, the period during which the decorative symbol and the enlargement effect are displayed overlapping is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative symbol is displayed without overlapping with the enlargement effect; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the normal reach presentation, the period during which the decorative symbol and the enlargement effect are displayed overlapping may be set to be shorter than the period during which the decorative symbol is displayed without overlapping with the enlargement effect.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the enlargement effect display light emission control data B corresponding to the display of the enlargement effect in the normal reach performance over a period E41 from the start of the normal reach performance to a specific time when the enlarged display of the decorative symbols, the display of the enlargement effect, and the output of the sound corresponding to the enlargement effect are all being executed, and thereafter, over a period E42 until the end of the normal reach performance, light emission control is executed based on the effect background light emission control data corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

(Strong Super Reach Title Production)
114, 115, 120, and 121, in the strong super reach title effect, during the period F1 from the start of the strong super reach title effect to the end of the super reach title effect, the title image of the strong super reach effect (reach title image) is enlarged. Specifically, from the start of the strong super reach title effect to the period F11, the reach title image (the white or red strong super reach title image) is displayed in a "small" state, smaller than the "medium" size of the decorative pattern, and then, after an enlarged display period (reach title image enlarged display period), it is changed to a "large" state, larger than the "medium" size of the decorative pattern. Thereafter, the reach title image is maintained in the "large" state until the end of the strong super reach title effect.

In other words, the period F1 from the start of the strong super reach title effect to the end of the strong super reach title effect is the display period of the reach title image in the strong super reach title effect, and the period F11 from the start of the strong super reach title effect to the end of the reach title image enlargement display period is the period from the start of the reach title image display in the strong super reach title effect to the completion of the enlargement.

In addition, in the strong super reach title presentation, an enlargement effect is displayed for the reach title image over period F2 while the reach title image is displayed in the "large" state, an enlargement effect corresponding to the display color (white or red) of the reach title image is displayed over period F3 from the end of the reach title image enlargement display period, a strong reach title corresponding sound is output corresponding to the strong reach title image displayed during the decorative effect display period and over period F4 from the timing after the enlargement effect display ends, and an enlargement effect corresponding sound corresponding to the enlargement effect is output over period F5 from the end of the reach title image enlargement display period to the timing when the strong reach title corresponding sound starts to be output.

In other words, period F2 is the display period for decorative effects in the Strong Super Reach title performance, period F3 is the display period for enlarged effects in the Strong Super Reach title performance, period F4 is the output period for sounds corresponding to the Strong Reach title in the Strong Super Reach title performance, and period F5 is the output period for sounds corresponding to enlarged effects in the Strong Super Reach title performance.

Here, in the Strong Super Reach title effect in this embodiment, period F1 is set to be longer than period F11 and periods F2 to F5, and period F5 is set to be longer than period F3. In other words, in the Strong Super Reach title effect, the display of the enlargement effect and the output of the enlargement effect-compatible sound start at the same time, but the display of the enlargement effect ends earlier than the enlargement effect-compatible sound.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period F2 from period F1 is set to be longer than period F2, and the period obtained by subtracting period F3 from period F1 is set to be longer than period F3. In other words, in the strong super reach title effect, the period during which the reach title image and decorative effect are displayed overlapping is set to be longer than the period during which the reach title image is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect, and the period during which the reach title image and enlargement effect are displayed overlapping is set to be longer than the period during which the reach title image is displayed without overlapping with the enlargement effect.

Furthermore, period F2 is set to be longer than period F3. In other words, in the strong super reach title effect, the period during which the reach title image is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the reach title image is displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect.

In this embodiment, the period during which the reach title image is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect is set longer than the period during which the pseudo-consecutive symbols are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when enlarged, or the period during which the pseudo-consecutive symbols are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when reduced; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the pseudo-consecutive symbols are displayed overlapping with the decorative effect may be set shorter than the period during which the pseudo-consecutive symbols are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when enlarged, or the period during which the pseudo-consecutive symbols are displayed overlapping with the enlargement effect when reduced.

In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the strong reach title effect corresponding to the color of the reach title image being displayed, from the start of the strong reach title effect through period F61, which is the same length as period F11; it is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data C for the enlargement effect display corresponding to the enlargement effect in the strong super reach title effect, from the end of period F11 (the end of the enlarged display period of the reach title image) through period F62, during which the decorative effect is displayed, the enlargement effect is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the enlargement effect is output; and thereafter, it is controlled to emit light based on the light emission control data for the strong reach title effect corresponding to the color of the reach title being displayed, for period F63, until the end of the strong super reach title effect.

(Pattern matching effect)
As shown in Figures 116, 120, and 121, in the symbol matching effect, each decorative symbol is enlarged during the period G1 from the start of the symbol matching effect to the end of the symbol matching effect. Specifically, from the start of the symbol matching effect through the period G11, the size of each decorative symbol is displayed in a "small" state, smaller than the normal "medium" size of the decorative symbol, and then, after an enlarged display period (decorative symbol enlargement display period), each decorative symbol is changed to a "large" state, larger than the normal "medium" size of the decorative symbol. Then, after each decorative symbol is displayed in the "large" state for a certain period of time, each decorative symbol is changed from the "large" state to the "medium" state after a reduced display period (decorative symbol display period). Note that from the end of the period G11 until the end of the symbol matching effect, each decorative symbol remains displayed in the "medium" state.

In other words, the period G1 from the start of the pattern matching effect to the end of the pattern matching effect is the period during which the decorative patterns are displayed in the pattern matching effect, and the period G11 from the start of the pattern matching effect to the end of the reduced decorative pattern display period is the period during which the decorative patterns are enlarged or reduced in size in the pattern matching effect.

In addition, in the pattern matching effect, a decorative effect corresponding to each decorative pattern is displayed over period G2 from the start of the pattern matching effect to the start of the reduced decorative pattern display period, an enlargement effect corresponding to each decorative pattern is displayed over period G3 from the end of the reduced decorative pattern display period, a sound corresponding to the decorative effect is output over period G4 from the start of the pattern matching effect to the start of the enlarged decorative pattern display period, a sound corresponding to the enlargement effect is output over period G5 from the end of the reduced decorative pattern display period, and a sound corresponding to a pattern size change is output over period G6 from the end of the enlarged decorative pattern display period in response to the size of each decorative pattern changing to "large" (enlarging).

In other words, period G2 is the period during which the decorative effect is displayed in the pattern matching performance, period G3 is the period during which the enlargement effect is displayed in the pattern matching performance, period G4 is the period during which the sound corresponding to the decorative effect is output in the pattern matching performance, period G5 is the period during which the sound corresponding to the enlargement effect is output in the pattern matching performance, and period G6 is the period during which the sound corresponding to the change in pattern size when enlarged in the pattern matching performance is output.

Here, in the symbol matching effect of this embodiment, period G1 is set to be longer than period G11 and periods G2 to G6. Furthermore, period G2 is set to be longer than period G4, and period G5 is set to be longer than period G3 (G1>G11, G1>G2, G1>G3, G1>G4, G1>G5, G1>G6, G2>G4, G5>G3). In other words, in the symbol matching effect, the display of the decorative effect and the output of the decorative effect-compatible sound start at the same time, while the output of the decorative effect-compatible sound ends earlier than the display of the decorative effect, and the display of the magnification effect and the output of the magnification effect-compatible sound start at the same time, while the display of the magnification effect ends earlier than the output of the magnification effect-compatible sound.

Furthermore, the period obtained by subtracting period G2 from period G1 is set to be longer than period G2, and the period obtained by subtracting period G3 from period G1 is set to be longer than period G3. In other words, in the pattern matching performance, the period during which the decorative pattern and the decorative effect are displayed overlapping is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the decorative effect, and the period during which the decorative pattern and the enlargement effect are displayed overlapping is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping with the enlargement effect.

Furthermore, period G2 is set to be longer than period G3. In other words, in the symbol matching performance, the period during which the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping with the magnification effect.

In this embodiment, the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect in the pattern matching performance is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping with the magnifying effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping with the decorative effect in the pattern matching performance may be set to be shorter than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping with the magnifying effect.

In addition, for the game effect lamp 9, illumination control is performed based on illumination control data B for displaying decorative effects corresponding to the decorative effects in the pattern matching effect over period G71, from the start of the pattern matching effect until the period during which each decorative symbol is maintained in the "large" state; illumination control is performed based on illumination control data for displaying pattern matching effects corresponding to the pattern matching effect over period G72, from the end of period G71 until the end of period G11; illumination control is performed based on illumination control data D for displaying enlargement effects corresponding to the enlargement effect in the pattern matching effect over period G73, from the end of period G11 until the display period of the enlargement effect and the output period of the enlargement effect sound; and thereafter, illumination control is performed based on illumination control data for displaying pattern matching effects corresponding to the pattern matching effect until the end of the pattern matching effect.

(Preview button effect)
117(A), 120, and 121, in the preview button effect, a light emitting effect is displayed as a decorative effect over a period X1 from the start of the preview button effect, and the display of an operation prompting image begins during the period X1. After the display of the operation prompting image is completed (after the end of the appearance display period shown in FIG. 117(A)), the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B also begins during the period X1.

(Decision button effect)
117(B), 120, and 121, in the deciding button effect, a light emitting effect is displayed as a decorative effect over a period Y1 from the start of the deciding button effect, and the display of an operation prompting image begins during the period Y1. After the display of the operation prompting image is completed (after the end of the appearance display period shown in FIG. 117(B)), the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B also begins during the period Y1.

Here, for the preview button effect and the deciding button effect in this embodiment, period Y1 is set to be longer than period X1.

Although not shown in Figure 121 above, when the expansion effect is performed when the pattern stops, the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed without overlapping decorative effects is set to be longer than the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed with overlapping decorative effects.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

(Variation 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 113 and 116, when a normal reach effect is executed, the illumination control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed by the illumination control data B for enlargement effect display corresponding to the display of the enlargement effect for the decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a normal reach effect is executed, the illumination control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed by illumination control data that is not corresponding to the enlargement effect for the decorative symbol (for example, as shown in Figure 129, during the entire execution period of the normal reach effect, the illumination control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed by the illumination control data for the practice background). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations about being controlled into a jackpot game state when it is still unclear whether the game will develop into a super reach effect.

(Variation 2)
In addition, in the second left-hit display effect in the above embodiment, a form has been exemplified in which the decorative effect SE9 targeted at the left-pointing arrow LY1 is displayed as the same decorative effect SE10 targeted at the left-pointing arrow LY2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 130, in the second left-hit display effect, after the left-pointing arrow LY2 appears without any effect, a decorative effect SE14 different from the decorative effect SE9 targeted at the left-pointing arrow LY1 may be displayed as the left-pointing arrow LY2. This makes it easier for the player to understand whether the left-pointing arrow LY1 or the left-pointing arrow LY2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

(Variation 3)
Furthermore, in the symbol matching effect in the above embodiment, the decorative effect SE6 is displayed as the appearance effect of the present invention for the decorative symbol that is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For the decorative symbol that is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, an effect that emphasizes the enlargement of the decorative symbol (for example, a wind effect that spreads from the center to the edge of the image display device 5) may be displayed in addition to the decorative effect SE6. Furthermore, the display of the effect that emphasizes the enlargement of the decorative symbol may be executed in both the symbol matching effect when the game is controlled from the low base state to the jackpot game state and the symbol matching effect when the game is controlled from the high base state to the jackpot game state, or may be executed only in the symbol matching effect when the game is controlled from the low base state to the jackpot game state, in which the variable display time of the special symbol is relatively long.

(Variation 4)
In addition, in the symbol matching effect in the above embodiment, an example has been given in which the enlargement effect KE12 is displayed as a stay effect of the present invention in the display area of the image display device 5, targeting the decorative symbols of the jackpot combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the enlargement effect KE12, the stay effect of the present invention may also display an effect that emphasizes the decorative symbols of the jackpot combination (for example, an effect in which light is reflected on each decorative symbol). Furthermore, the display of the effect that emphasizes the enlargement of the decorative symbols may be executed in both the symbol matching effect when the game is controlled from the low base state to the jackpot game state and the symbol matching effect when the game is controlled from the high base state to the jackpot game state, or may be executed only in the symbol matching effect when the game is controlled from the low base state to the jackpot game state, in which the variable display time of the special symbol is relatively long.

(Variation 5)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the pattern matching effect is exemplified as a form in which a common decorative effect SE6 is displayed when the game state is in a low base state and when the game state is in a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different types of decorative effects may be displayed for the pattern matching effect in a low base state and the pattern matching effect in a high base state.

(Variation 6)
In addition, in the above embodiment, various effects during variable display (effects corresponding to the predetermined effects of the present invention, such as enlarged decorative symbols at the start of variable display, dialogue notice effects, pseudo consecutive effects, reach suggestion effects, normal reach effects, weak super reach title effects, development effects, strong super reach title effects, cut-in effects, and symbol alignment effects) and demo effects (demo movies, effects corresponding to the demonstration effects of the present invention) in a state in which variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory of special symbols in a low base state or a high base state are performed by using enlargement effects and decorations on characters, letters, etc., which correspond to the objects of the present invention. While the present invention has been described with reference to an example of displaying an effect, it is not limited thereto. For example, a predetermined effect may display a first object, such as a specific character or letter, and a first effect targeting the first object. A demonstration effect may display a second object, such as a character or letter different from the predetermined effect, and a second effect targeting the second object. While the second object and the second effect cannot be displayed during the execution of the predetermined effect, the first object and the first effect may be displayed during the execution of the demonstration effect. For example, after the scene shown in FIG. 82(O) is executed in the demonstration effect but before the scene shown in FIG. 82(P) is executed, a "performance introduction" section is displayed, which introduces some of the performances that can be executed during the variable display. In the "performance introduction" section, dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, which display the first dialogue preview performance, an enlargement effect KE1, and an image KG2 and an enlargement effect KE11, which display the cut-in performance, are displayed together with the word "DEMO." That is, during variable display, it is possible to display the dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, which are the display of the first dialogue preview performance, the enlargement effect KE1, the image KG2, which is the display of the cut-in performance, and the enlargement effect KE11, while it is possible to display the model main title name display 003SG520A, the model subtitle name display 003SG520B, the model subtitle name display 003SG520C, the enlargement effect KE21, and the decoration effect SE22 in the demonstration performance shown in Figures 82(P) to 82(V). In the demonstration performance, it is possible to display dialogue images CG1A and CG1B, which are the display of the first dialogue preview performance, an enlargement effect KE1, an image KG2, which is the display of the cut-in performance, and an enlargement effect KE11, and it is also possible to display model main title name display 003SG520A, model subtitle name display 003SG520B, model subtitle name display 003SG520C, an enlargement effect KE21, and a decorative effect SE22 in the demonstration performance.

(Variation 7)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the jackpot type when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot is exemplified as a jackpot C type with 10 rounds and in which both the probability variable control and the time-saving control are executed up to 100 times in the high base state after the jackpot game ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot may be a jackpot (in this variation 7, jackpot D shown in FIG. 131) with a different number of rounds, whether or not probability variable control and time-saving control are executed in the high base state after the jackpot game ends, or the maximum number of times they are executed. Furthermore, in this way, when jackpot C and jackpot D are provided as jackpot types when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the number of types of effects displayed during the jackpot game of jackpot D may be greater than the total number of types of effects displayed during the demo effect (demo movie). Furthermore, the effects executed during the jackpot game of jackpot D are as shown in Figures 70, 75, 78, 79, and 80.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a jackpot gaming state is considered to be an advantageous state, in which gaming balls are able to enter the large prize entry port, resulting in more prize balls being paid out than when gaming balls enter the starting prize entry port or the general prize entry port 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state or a probability variable state (high base state) may also be considered to be an advantageous state as long as it is an advantageous gaming state for the player, such as making it easier for gaming balls to enter the prize entry port than in a normal state, or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot gaming state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that contain enclosed gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but can also be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying variable display performance identification information;
A game control means;
and a performance control means for controlling the display means to display a plurality of types of images including objects according to a performance situation.
the game control means is capable of controlling to a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state after controlling the advantageous state,
The display means
When the variable display of the effect identification information is started in the normal state and then controlled to the first advantageous state,
a first object corresponding to the name of the first advantageous state can be displayed;
A second object that prompts the player to launch the game medium into a specific area in the game area can be displayed;
When the state is controlled to a second advantageous state after the variable display of the effect identification information has started in the special state, a third object corresponding to the name of the second advantageous state can be displayed;
the first object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
the second object is started to be displayed without an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from that of the first object;
the third object is started to be displayed with an appearance effect, and then is displayed with a stay effect different from the appearance effect;
the stay effect of the first object is an effect that imitates the first object and expands it,
the first object continues to be displayed even after the stay effect of the first object is erased,
the stay effect of the third object is an effect that imitates the third object and expands it;
the third object continues to be displayed even after the stay effect of the third object is erased ,
A gaming machine in which the display of the first object and the third object begins at a timing after the start of an advantageous state when the variable display that triggers control into an advantageous state ends and the display of the second object begins .